Ford - Bronco - Owners Manual - 1995 - 1995

File:ltpib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:42 1995 [PI00300(B )04/95] thirty-six pica chart:0021233-C File:ltpib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:42 1995 *[PI00800( ALL)05/95] thirty-six pica chart: File:ltpib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:42 1995 *[PI02300( ALL)05/95] Table of Contents Introductory Information ............................... 1 Safety Restraints ............................................ 11 Starting Your Bronco .................................... 59 Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 73 Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 89 Steering Column Controls ........................ 105 Features .......................................................... 119 Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 149 Driving Your Bronco .................................. 175 Roadside Emergencies ................................ 237 Customer Assistance ................................... 255 Accessories .................................................... 267 Servicing Your Bronco ............................... 275 Quick Index .................................................. 355 Index ............................................................... 363 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 Introductory Information *[IN00300( ALL)04/95] *[IN00400( ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuous commitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedication to learning what you want, determination to develop the right concept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, and attention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standard by which others are judged. *[IN00500( ALL)04/95] *[IN00600( ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles *[IN00700( ALL)04/95] ❑ You are the focus of everything we do. Our *[IN00750( ALL)04/95] ❑ Continuous improvement is essential to our *[IN00800( ALL)04/95] ❑ Employee involvement is our way of life. *[IN00900( ALL)04/95] ❑ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We ❑ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of our products and services must be our number one priority. work must be done with you in mind, providing better products and services than our competition. success. We must strive for excellence in everything we do: in our products — in their safety and value — and in our services, our human relations, our competitiveness, and our profitability. We are a team. We must treat one another with trust and respect. must maintain mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our other business associates. 1 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 *[IN01000( ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct *[IN01100( ALL)04/95] Things to Know About Using This Guide *[IN01112(BEF )04/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. This guide has information about the equipment and the options for your new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the options available to you. If you do not know which information applies to your vehicle, talk to your dealer. *[IN01137(BEF )04/95] This guide describes equipment and gives specifications for equipment that was in effect when this guide was approved for printing. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications or design without any notice and without incurring obligation. *[IN01162( ALL)05/95] *[IN01164( ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS *[IN01166( ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areas where carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle or personal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people. Please read all WARNINGS carefully. *[IN01168( ALL)05/95] RWARNING worldwide must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and commands respect for its integrity and for its positive contributions to society. NOTES give you additional information about the subject matter you are referencing. 2 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 *[IN01600( ALL)04/95] Finding Information in This Guide [IN01700( ALL)04/95] After you have read this guide once, you will probably return to it when you have a specific question or need additional information. To help you find specific information quickly, you can use the table of contents or the index. *[IN01800(BEF )05/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a page number following each item which indicates where detailed information can be found. *[IN02000( ALL)05/95] This guide has a table of contents at the beginning of the book to show chapter titles. *[IN02100( ALL)04/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in the alphabetical listing for the word that best describes the information you need. If the word you chose is not listed, think of other related words and look them up. We have designed the Index so that you can find information under a technical term. *[IN02200( ALL)04/95] *[IN02300( ALL)05/95] Canadian Owners — French Version *[IN02400( ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet *[IN02500( ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the services that are most important for keeping your vehicle in good condition. A record log is also provided to help you keep track of all services performed. % French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. 3 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 % *[IN02600( ALL)01/95] *[IN02700(BEF )04/95] About the Warranties Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions Warranties. % Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights and responsibilities. *[IN03250( ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a new one free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first page of this owner guide. *[IN04000( ALL)01/95] *[IN04100( ALL)01/94] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan *[IN04200( ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle. However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealer for more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan. *[IN04250( ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for the details. *[IN03100( ALL)03/95] % If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contract provides service protection for a longer period of time than the basic warranty that comes with your vehicle. 4 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 *[IN04650(B M)06/92] *[IN04700(B )11/89] Special Notice *[IN04810(B )11/89] As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read the Additional Special Driving Instructions for Utility Vehicles in this book and the special supplement included with four-wheel drive vehicles entitled 4-Wheeling with Ford. *[IN04850(B )03/95] *[IN04875(B )03/95] AMBULANCE PACKAGES NOTICE TO OWNERS OF UTILITY-TYPE VEHICLES RWARNING Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. % Your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) *[IN05200( ALL)05/95] Your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the same as the warranty number that appears on your owner card. You should include this number any time you write to Ford Motor Company about your vehicle. *[IN05300(BEF )05/95] The Vehicle Identification Number is attached to your vehicle in the following places: *[IN05400(BEF )05/95] ❑ on the metal tag attached to the top of the *[IN05100( ALL)05/95] instrument panel on the driver’s side — you can see the tag by looking through the windshield from outside your vehicle. 5 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 *[IN05450(BEF )10/89] one inch art:0010558-A Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number) *[IN05500(BEF )05/95] % ❑ on the Safety Compliance Certification Label this label is attached to the left front door lock facing or the door latch post pillar. It is required by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and is made of special material. If someone tampers with it, it will be destroyed and/or a destruction pattern will appear. *[IN05515( ALL)04/94] The label contains the name of the manufacturer, the month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the Vehicle Identification Number. The label also contains Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Ratings, wheel and tire data and information codes for additional vehicle data. For further information about the Safety Compliance Certification Label and the information contained on it, refer to the Index. *[IN05545( ALL)04/95] Federal Highway Administration Regulation *[IN05560( ALL)04/95] Regulations such as those issued by the Federal Highway Administration or issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and/or state and local laws and regulations may require additional equipment for the way you intend to use the vehicle. It is the responsibility of the registered owner to determine the applicability of such laws and regulations to your intended use for the vehicle, and to arrange for the installation of required 6 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 equipment. Your Ford dealer has information about the availability of many items of equipment which may be ordered for your vehicle. *[IN06000( ALL)01/95] *[IN06100( ALL)03/95] *[IN06300( ALL)01/95] % Breaking Your Vehicle In Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-in period during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention to how you drive your vehicle. ❑ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brake linings, you should take these steps: *[IN06400( ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when to stop. *[IN06500( ALL)01/95] *[IN06600( ALL)01/95] *[IN06700( ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance. *[IN06750( ALL)12/93] *[IN06800(BEF )01/95] % — Apply the brakes gradually. The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving. ❑ Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to proper torque specifications at 500 miles/800 km of new vehicle operation. Proper torque specifications are provided in this guide. Also retighten to proper torque specification at 500 miles/800 km after any wheel change or any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. ❑ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. See Engine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special “break-in” oils. 7 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 % Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle *[IN07200(BEF )04/95] *[IN07300(BEF )04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle *[IN07400(BEF )04/95] *[IN07500(BEF )04/95] *[IN07600(BEF )04/95] DO NOT: *[IN07700(BEF )04/95] *[IN07800(BEF )05/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot *[IN07100(BEF )04/95] % Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with a mild detergent. ❑ Wash your vehicle with hot water ❑ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean. *[IN07900(BEF )05/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical industrial fallout. *[IN08000(BE )05/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in paint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered by warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring their vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative. *[IN08100(BEF )04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the finish. 8 File:ltinb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:32:32 1995 *[IN08200(BEF )04/95] *[IN08300(BEF )04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts *[IN08400(BEF )04/95] *[IN08500(BEF )04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts *[IN08600(BEF )04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or petroleum-based cleaners. % % *[IN08700(BEF )04/95] % Wash chrome and aluminum parts with the same detergent you use to wash the vehicle body, such as Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate. You can use Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover or equivalent to clean grease, oil, and tar from chrome-plated parts, including wheelcovers, aluminum wheels, bumpers, or anodized aluminum parts. Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine cleaning. If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause deterioration. 9 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 Safety Restraints *[SR00500(BEF )04/95] *[SR00600(BEF )03/95] Important Safety Belt Information The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and your passengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canada the law requires their use. *[SR00700(BEF )01/95] *[SR00800(BEF )01/95] *[SR00900(BEF )01/95] *[SR01000(BEF )01/95] *[SR01100(BEF )01/95] *[SR01200(BEF )01/95] *[SR02000(BEF )05/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when: *[SR02100(BEF )01/95] See the following sections in this chapter for directions on how to properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this chapter for special instructions about using safety belts for children. *[SR02200(BEF )05/95] % ❑ the seatback is upright ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched) ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest ❑ the knees are straight forward To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warning light may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime in the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter. RWARNING Make sure that you and your passengers wear safety belts. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 11 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR02400(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Passengers should not be allowed to ride in the cargo area. Persons not riding in a seat with a fastened seat belt are much more likely to suffer serious injury in a collision. Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harm to passengers. *[SR02500(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. *[SR02600(BEF )05/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, children should always ride with the seatback upright. *[SR02800(BEF )03/95] RWARNING Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never use a single belt for more than one person or across more than one seating position. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision. 12 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR02900(BEF )05/95] Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen the risk of the door coming open in a collision. [SR02920(B )04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for front seat passenger and a locking “cinch tongue” for rear seat outboard passengers. [SR02930(BEF )04/95] Dual Locking Mode Retractors [SR02940(BEF )04/95] Vehicle Sensitive (Emergency) Locking Mode [SR02950(BEF )04/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. [SR02960(BEF )04/95] The front seat belt retractor can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt. [SR02970(BEF )04/95] Automatic Locking Mode [SR02980(BEF )04/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will be automatically locked and remain locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides the following: [SR02990(BEF )04/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on occupant ❑ Child seat/infant carrier installation restraint [SR03000(BEF )04/95] [SR03010(B F )04/95] RWARNING Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seat. [SR03020(BEF )04/95] This mode must be used when installing a child seat on the front passenger seat and rear outboard seats where dual locking retractors are provided. 13 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR03030(BEF )04/95] To switch the retractor from the “emergency locking mode” to the “automatic locking mode,” perform the following steps: [SR03040(BEF )04/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt. [SR03050(BEF )04/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted, and when allowed to retract, a clicking sound will be heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in the “automatic locking mode” (child restraint mode). [SR03060(BEF )04/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard as the belt is allowed to retract. This indicates that the retractor is in the “automatic locking mode.” [SR03070(BEF )04/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor will switch back to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seats for Children in this chapter. [SR03080(B )04/95] Locking Cinch Tongue [SR03085(B )04/95] The “locking cinch tongue” will slide up and down the belt webbing when belt is in the stowed position or while putting seat belt on. When the “locking cinch tongue” of the lap/shoulder combination seat belt is latched into buckle, the “cinch tongue” will allow the lap portion to become shorter, but locks the webbing in-place to restrict it from becoming longer. [SR03090(B )04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with safety seat belts containing a “cinch tongue” at the rear outboard seating positions. 14 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR03095(B )04/95] Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt having a “cinch tongue” into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor. While holding the webbing below the tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue so that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the tongue upward. Provide enough lap belt length so that tongue can reach the buckle. [SR03100(B )04/95] NOTE: If you grasp the tongue by the tongue cover to lengthen the belt, the tongue cover will grab the webbing, making it difficult to slide. [SR03105(B )05/95] half page art:0021501-A 15 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR03110(B )04/95] To fasten a “cinch tongue,” pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist. (For instructions on how to remove a twist, see the How to Untwist or Unjam a Safety Belt Retractor section in this chapter.) Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue. Adjust the lap belt portion of the safety belt by pulling up on the shoulder belt until the lap belt fits snugly and as low as possible around your hips. [SR03115(B )05/95] half page art:0000841-B Lab and shoulder belt fastened 16 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR03120(BEF )05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts *[SR03125(BEF )05/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, corner hard or if your truck receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination lap/shoulder belt locks and helps reduce your forward movement. The front seat belt systems can also be made to lock by jerking on the shoulder belt. *[SR03130(BEF )05/95] NOTE: The rear belts cannot be made to lock up by jerking on shoulder belt. *[SR03135(BEF )05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Then adjust the seat to the position that suits you best. [SR03137(BEF )05/95] To fasten the belt *[SR03140(BEF )05/95] Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue. [SR03150(B )05/95] one third page art:0020639-D 17 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR03155(B )05/95] 7-1/2 pica art:0021500-A *[SR03160(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never use a single belt for more than one person. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision. *[SR03165(BEF )05/95] To tighten the lap portion of the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt until it fits you snugly. The belt should rest as low on your hips as possible. [SR03185(BEF )05/95] Due to folding rear seats, sometimes the buckles and tongues toward the center of the vehicle may be hidden by the rear edge of the seat cushion. Pull them out so they will be accessible. 18 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR03190(BEF )05/95] While you are fastened in the seat belt, the combination lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement. % Adjustable Lap Belts Without Retractors [SR07100(B )05/95] On the center position of the front and rear three-passenger bench seats you will find a lap-belt without a retractor, but does have a locking adjustable tongue. Shorten this belt and fasten it to buckle when you are not using it. To lengthen the belt, tip the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull the belt over your lap until the tongue reaches the buckle. *[SR06800(BEF )05/95] [SR07400(BEF )05/95] one third page art:0020638-C Fastening occupant safety lap belts [SR07500(BEF )04/95] To fasten the belt, pull the belt across your hips and insert the tongue into the correct buckle on your seat until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the buckle is securely fastened by pulling tongue. 19 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR07600(BEF )03/91] Adjust the belt so that it fits snugly and as low as possible around the hips: *[SR07700(BEF )02/95] ❑ If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it *[SR07800(BEF )03/95] ❑ If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the [SR08500(BEF )05/95] To unfasten the belt: [SR08525(BEF )05/95] 1. and repeat the procedure above. loose end of the webbing. Push the release button on the buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch from the buckle. [SR08600(B )05/95] 7-1/2 pica art:0020639-D Unfastening the front outboard lap/shoulder belts [SR08625(B )05/95] 7-1/2 pica art:0021500-A Unfastening the rear outboard lap/shoulder belts [SR08650(BEF )05/95] 2. 20 While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its stowed position. If you do not guide the tongue, it may strike you or part of the vehicle. File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR08651(B )05/95] Instructions for securing child safety seats with combination lap/shoulder safety belts having “cinch tongues” are provided later in this chapter. *[SR08800(BEF )03/95] How to Untwist or Unjam a Safety Belt Retractor *[SR08900(BEF )03/95] If you should jam the lap belt retractor by allowing the belt to retract when it is twisted, you can free the webbing with this procedure: *[SR09000(BEF )03/95] 1. Pull on the belt with both hands to tighten it on the retractor spool. *[SR09100(BEF )03/95] 2. Feed the belt back into the retractor until it is completely retracted. Repeat previous step if necessary. [SR09200(BEF )02/95] 3. Pull the belt out of the retractor as far as it will go and untwist the belt or remove the object that is jamming the belt. Let the belt retract. *[SR09300(BEF )03/95] 4. Then, pull the belt out and let it retract several times to make sure that the belt works properly. 21 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR09505(BEF )05/95] Procedure to Correct a Twisted Safety Shoulder Belt at the “D” Ring (if so equipped) Front and/or Rear Outboard Seating Positions [SR09507(BEF )05/95] NOTE: The restraint system shown in the following figures may be different than the restraint system in your vehicle. However, use these figures and this procedure to correct a twisted safety shoulder belt at any outboard seating position that has a “D” ring. [SR09510(BEF )05/95] half page art:0060598-C 22 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 1. Grasp the belt webbing at the “D” ring. See Figure 2. [SR09525(BEF )05/95] 2. Rotate and fold the belt webbing over itself as required to remove the twist. [SR09527(BEF )05/95] 3. Feed the folded portion of the belt through the “D” ring. [SR09530(BEF )05/95] 4. When completed, the safety belt should look like Figure 3. [SR09515(BEF )05/95] [SR09520(BEF )05/95] half page art:0060599-D 23 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR09535(BEF )05/95] half page art:0060600-D *[SR09600(BEF )05/95] *[SR09700(BEF )05/95] % *[SR09750(BEF )05/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly For some people, the safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length with a safety belt extension assembly (part number 611C22). Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from your dealer. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. *[SR09800(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these instructions will affect the performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury. 24 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 % Safety Belt Maintenance [SR10000(BEF )02/95] Check your safety belt system periodically to make sure that it works properly and isn’t damaged. If the webbing shows any wear, nicks or cuts, have it examined by a qualified technician to determine if replacement is necessary. Always have your safety belt system checked after a collision by a qualified technician. *[SR10200(BEF )05/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if so equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if so equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. *[SR10210(BEF )05/95] *[SR10220(BEF )05/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts *[SR10300(BEF )04/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) *[SR10400(B )03/94] *[SR10500(B F )03/95] Driver air bag *[SR09900(BEF )05/95] % Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that is recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it. Your vehicle is equipped with a driver side air bag supplemental restraint system located in the steering wheel and identified by the letters “SRS” in the center of the wheel. 25 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR10600(BEF )03/95] The driver air bag is a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), provided in addition to the driver lap/shoulder belt, and is designed to supplement the protection provided to a properly belted driver in moderate to severe frontal collisions. The supplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to the lower body. *[SR10650(BEF )02/95] *[SR10700(BEF )11/93] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts RWARNING Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle occupants to be properly restrained and help reduce the risk of injury in a collision. *[SR10750(BEF )05/95] RWARNING All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always wear their safety belts, even when an air bag Supplemental Restraint System is provided. *[SR10900(BEF )01/95] There are four very important reasons to use safety belts even with an air bag system. Use your safety belts to: [SR11000(BEF )02/95] ❑ help keep you in the proper seating position (away from the air bag) when it inflates *[SR11100(BEF )01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or *[SR11200(BEF )01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions *[SR11300(BEF )01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from your rear impact collisions, because an air bag is not designed to inflate in such situations that are not severe enough to activate the supplemental air bag vehicle 26 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR11400(BEF )01/95] *[SR11500(BEF )05/95] % *[SR11600(BEF )05/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to help provide additional protection for you. In order to do this, the air bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are not seated in a normal riding position with your back against the seatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and could possibly hurt you as it inflates. RWARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag cover on the steering wheel or in front seat areas that may come in contact with a deploying air bag. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. % How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System Operates *[SR11900(BEF )10/94] The air bag supplemental restraint system has two main parts. One part is the air bag system with the driver air bag and inflator located in the center of the steering wheel. The second part is the electrical system, which has impact sensors, and a diagnostic module, and backup power supply. The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental air bag electrical system readiness, including the impact sensors, the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, air bag power, and the air bag ignitor. *[SR11800(BEF )01/95] 27 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR12050(B F )03/93] half page art:0021011-A The location of the air bag and warning label *[SR12200(BEF )05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light and a tone to indicate the condition of the system. The readiness light is in the instrument cluster. When you turn the ignition to the ON position, this light will illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of the air bag system is not required. *[SR12300(BEF )05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: the readiness light will either flash or stay lit, or it will not light, or a group of five beeps will be heard. *[SR12360(BEF )04/95] RWARNING If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the air bag system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. 28 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR12400(BEF )03/95] *[SR12500(BEF )03/95] *[SR12600(BEF )05/95] Tone generator The air bag readiness light indicates the air bag system condition. However, a series of five sets of five beeps will be heard only if the readiness light does not work and there is a problem with the air bag system. This also means that the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is in need of service. The tone pattern will repeat (five sets of five beeps) periodically until the problem and light are repaired. Unless serviced, the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System may not function properly in the event of a collision. RWARNING Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. [SR12700(BEF )04/95] The air bag system is designed to stay out of sight until it is activated. The air bag system is designed to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions more severe than hitting a parked vehicle of similar size and weight head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses the crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag. The system activates when the sensors detect a forward deceleration equal to or greater than the deceleration experienced if you would drive your vehicle into a solid wall at 14 mph. In some side impacts, the forward deceleration of your vehicle can be great enough to deploy your air bag. 29 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR12720(BEF )03/95] The following four steps show how the air bag system works: *[SR12740(BEF )03/95] 1. Sensors in the vehicle will detect the degree of severity of a frontal impact. When the sensor system is activated, electric current flows to the inflator and the system ignites the gas generant. *[SR12760(BEF )03/95] 2. The propellant then rapidly burns in the metal container. The rapid burning produces nitrogen gas and small amounts of dust. The nitrogen gas and dust are cooled and filtered during inflation of the air bag. *[SR12780(BEF )03/95] 3. The inflating supplemental air bag splits open the trim cover. The supplemental air bag then rapidly unfolds and inflates in front of the driver. *[SR12801(BEF )03/95] NOTE: STEPS 1-3 TAKE PLACE IN A FRACTION OF A SECOND. *[SR12820(BEF )03/95] 4. *[SR12840(BEF )03/95] The surface of the air bags and the vehicle interior may be dusted with a powdery residue. The powder is cornstarch or talcum powder, which is used to lubricate the air bag as it inflates, and sodium compounds such as sodium carbonates (e.g., baking soda), and possibly a very small amount of sodium hydroxide that may be irritating to the skin and eyes, but is not toxic. *[SR12860(BEF )03/95] Right after air bag inflation, you may notice smoke (from the powder and dust) and smell the burnt propellant. This is normal. 30 After inflation, the gas empties through holes in the air bag. The air bag deflates at once. File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR12880(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. *[SR12901(BEF )05/95] Air bags may not inflate in certain frontal collisions, even though the vehicle may be badly damaged. The fact that your air bag did not inflate in such a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the air bag system. Rather, it means the crash forces were not severe enough to need an air bag to prevent serious injury. *[SR13000(BEF )03/93] half page art:0011063-A Inflated driver side air bag 31 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR13500(BEF )05/95] RWARNING If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. *[SR13600(BEF )03/95] Disposal of supplemental air bag equipped vehicles *[SR13700(BEF )03/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the procedures in the 1995 Ford Service Manual. Information on how to order a service manual is available at an authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. You can also order a service manual using the order form in the Accessories chapter of your Owner Guide. *[SR13800(BEF )05/95] *[SR13900(BEF )05/95] Service and information labels % Service and information labels are attached to the sun visors, the headliner above the sun visors (Canadian vehicles), and the radiator support in the engine compartment. 32 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR14000(BEF )04/95] full page art:0020847-D The label located on the back of the driver’s sun visor 33 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR14200(BEF )02/94] one third page art:0010605-D Label on radiator support in the engine compartment % *[SR14300(BEF )05/95] *[SR14400(BEF )02/95] Safety Restraints for Children In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle — this generally includes children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you must put them in safety seats that are made specially for children. Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for these children. Check your local and state laws for specific requirements. *[SR14500(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. 34 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR14600(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Passengers should not be allowed to ride in the cargo area. Persons not riding in a seat with a fastened seat belt are much more likely to suffer serious injury in a collision. Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harm to passengers. *[SR14700(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. *[SR14800(BEF )05/95] *[SR15000(BEF )05/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. RWARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. *[SR15025(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle. 35 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR15250(BEF )05/95] *[SR15300(BEF )05/95] % Safety Belts for Children Children who are too large for child safety seats should always wear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, or contact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of child that will safely fit in the seat.) *[SR15400(BEF )05/95] RWARNING If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted as described, the risk of serious injury to the child in a collision will be much greater. *[SR15500(BEF )05/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and shoulder belts can be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. *[SR15600(BEF )01/95] RWARNING If the shoulder belt cannot be properly positioned, move the child to one of the seats with a lap belt only (preferably in a rear seat) and use the lap belt. *[SR15700(BEF )05/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and shoulder belts should always be worn snugly and below the hips, touching the child’s thighs. *[SR15800(BEF )05/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, children should always ride with the seatback upright. 36 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR15900(BEF )01/95] *[SR16000(BEF )05/95] Safety Seats for Children *[SR16015(BEF )02/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps in this chapter. [SR16025(BEF )05/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position making sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle and for a shoulder/lap belt combination with a sliding tongue make sure the retractor is in the “automatic locking mode.” *[SR16095(BEF )05/95] All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. *[SR16100(BEF )05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when installing and using the safety seat. RWARNING If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the child occupying the seat may be injured during a collision or sudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injure other passengers. 37 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16200(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. *[SR16250(BEF )10/94] RWARNING Seatbacks should be upright for use with child safety seats. *[SR16275(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Always keep the buckle release button pointing upward and away from the child seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button as shown in the following illustration. [SR16280(BEF )05/95] half page art:0021377-B 38 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR16300(BEF )04/95] Installing Child Safety Seats [SR16315(B )04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the front seat passenger and locking “cinch tongue” for rear outboard passengers. [SR16330(B )04/95] If you choose to install a forward-facing child safety seat in the front seating positions, move vehicle seat as far back as possible. [SR16335(B )04/95] For front passenger seating positions equipped with a dual-locking mode retractor, use the following procedure: [SR16340(B )04/95] For rear outboard seating positions, refer to cinch tongue procedure. *[SR16345(BEF )04/95] 1. Position the child seat in the center of the passenger seat. 39 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16350(BEF )04/95] 2. *[SR16355(BEF )04/95] half page art:0011238-B 40 Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp shoulder belt and lap belt together. Figure 1. File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16360(BEF )04/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be sure that the belt webbing is not twisted. [SR16365(BEF )04/95] half page art:0011239-B Routing the lap/shoulder belt 41 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16370(BEF )04/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that seating position until you hear and feel the latch engage. Figure 3. Make sure tongue is latched securely to buckle by pulling on tongue. *[SR16375(BEF )04/95] half page art:0011240-B Buckling the belt 42 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16380(BEF )04/95] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this time, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child seat restraint mode). Figure 4. *[SR16385(BEF )04/95] NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor must be in the automatic locking mode to properly restrain a child. *[SR16390(BEF )04/95] half page art:0011241-A Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode 43 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16395(BEF )04/95] 6. *[SR16400(BEF )04/95] half page art:0011242-A 44 Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Push down on the child seat while you pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt. Figures 5 and 6. File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16405(BEF )04/95] half page art:0011243-A 45 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16410(BEF )04/95] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat, forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that the seat is securely held in place, Figure 7. *[SR16412(BEF )04/95] half page art:0011244-A Checking that the seat is secure 46 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16415(BEF )04/95] 8. Double check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Try to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the belt is in the automatic locking mode, Figure 8. *[SR16420(BEF )04/95] half page art:0011245-B Checking the retractor *[SR16425(BEF )04/95] 9. Check to make sure that the child seat is properly secured prior to each use. If the retractor is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 7. *[SR16430(BEF )04/95] To remove the retractor from automatic lock mode, allow webbing to retract fully to its stowed position and the retractor will automatically switch back to the vehicle sensitive locking mode for normal adult usage. 47 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR16440(BEF )04/95] Installing a Child Safety Seat at the Rear Center Seating Position with Locking Adjustable Lap Belt [SR16450(BEF )04/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the tongue up the webbing. [SR16455(BEF )04/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position. [SR16460(BEF )04/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. [SR16465(BEF )04/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue. [SR16470(BEF )04/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt. [SR16475(BEF )04/95] 6. Before placing the child into child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-side and in forward directions to ensure that the seat is held securely in place. If the child seat moves excessively, repeat steps 5 through 6, or properly install the child seat in a different seating position. 48 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR16480(B )04/95] Installing Child Safety Seats at the Rear Outboard Seating Positions (For lap and shoulder belts combination with “cinch tongues”) [SR16485(B )04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat safety belts containing a “cinch tongue.” The rear outboard safety belts will have the following label: [SR16490(B )05/95] half page art:0021502-A 49 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 [SR16495(B )04/95] If you install a child safety seat or infant carrier in a rear outboard seating position having a combination lap and shoulder belt with “cinch tongue,” use the following procedure: *[SR16500(B )04/95] 1. Grasp the belt webbing below the tongue and pull as much of the belt out of the retractor as possible. Hold the belt out. See Figure 1. [SR16505(B )05/95] half page art:0011363-A *[SR16510(B )04/95] NOTE: The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt. 50 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16515(B )04/95] 2. With your other hand, grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue (not the cover) and slide the tongue up the webbing as far as it will go. See Figure 1. Release the tongue, but do not let go of the lap portion of the belt webbing. *[SR16520(B )04/95] 3. While still holding the belt webbing below the tongue in one hand, use your other hand to grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue and belt webbing together, and again pull out as much of the belt as possible. Then, let go of the lap portion of the belt webbing. *[SR16525(B )04/95] 4. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be sure that the belt webbing is not twisted. *[SR16530(B )05/95] half page art:0011364-A 51 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16535(B )04/95] 5. *[SR16540(B )05/95] half page art:0011365-A 52 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely latched to the buckle by pulling on the tongue. See Figure 3. File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16545(B )04/95] 6. Push down on the child seat and pull up on the shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap belt portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt. See Figure 4. *[SR16550(B )05/95] half page art:0011366-A 53 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16555(B )04/95] 7. *[SR16560(B )05/95] half page art:0011367-A 54 Grasp belt close to child seat and pull on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt, then allow the belt to retract and remove all slack to securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle. See Figure 5. File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16565(B )04/95] 8. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-side and in forward directions to make sure that the seat is held securely in place. See Figures 6 and 7. If the child seat moves excessively, repeat steps 6 through 8, or properly install the child seat in a different seating position. [SR16570(B )05/95] half page art:0011368-A 55 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR16575(B )05/95] half page art:0011369-A *[SR16580(B )04/95] 9. 56 Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the lap/shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt tight during a collision. File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR18400(BEF )04/95] *[SR18410(BEF )03/01] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps [SR18413(BEF )02/95] Some manufacturers make safety seats that include an upper tether strap that goes over the seatback and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. *[SR18417(B )12/91] You can attach a tether strap anchor bracket to the rear floor by using a tether anchor kit (613D74), available at no charge from any Ford dealership. *[SR18420(BEF )03/91] Read and follow the instructions provided with the kit carefully for installation of the child tether strap anchor. *[SR18501(BEF )03/91] Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to attach the tether strap to the tether bracket. *[SR18700(B )04/95] Ford recommends placement of tethered safety seats in a rear seating position with the tether strap installed to the tether anchoring point as shown in the instructions provided with the child tether strap anchor kit. [SR18875(B )04/95] This vehicle has provisions to install a tether anchorage in the front, right hand and all second row seating positions. It is easiest to install a tether anchor at the second row, rear, center seating position. [SR18900(B )03/91] If the tethered seat is installed in the front seat, Ford recommends the center front seating position, with the tether strap secured to the center rear lap belt tongue or to the webbing of the buckled center rear lap belt behind the child safety seat. The front, right hand seating position may be used if it is the only seating position available. General Instructions 57 File:ltsrb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:58:10 1995 *[SR18950(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Only use the tether attachment hole locations shown in the illustrations. The tether anchor may not perform properly if the wrong mounting location is used. *[SR19400(B F )04/95] The rear lap/shoulder safety belts should not be used to secure the tether strap of a safety seat located in the front seat. *[SR19500(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these precautions could increase the chance of injury in an accident. *[SR19550(B )05/95] RWARNING If the anchor bolt(s) is ever removed, the hole(s) in the floor must be sealed to prevent the possibility of exhaust fumes entering the passenger compartment. 58 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 Starting Your Bronco *[ST01700( ALL)03/95] % [ST01800( ALL)01/95] * *[ST02000( ALL)05/90] Ignition Understanding the Positions of the Ignition quarter page art:0020004-B The positions of the key in the ignition lock cylinder. *[ST02200( ALL)03/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights (except the brake system warning light) to make sure they work before you start the engine. The key returns to the ON position once the engine is started and remains in this position while the engine runs. *[ST02300( ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine starts so that you do not damage the starter. The key should return to ON when you release it. The START position also allows you to test the brake warning light. *[ST02400( ALL)03/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all accessories without locking the steering wheel or the automatic transmission gearshift lever. [ST02500(B F )05/95] LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks the gearshift if your vehicle’s gearshift is on the column. 59 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST02600(B F )05/95] RWARNING LOCK position does not lock the gearshift on floor-mounted gearshifts. If the parking brake is not set and the gearshift is moved out of Park (automatic transmission) or out of gear (manual transmission), your vehicle may move unexpectedly. [ST02635(B F )05/95] With the transfer case in N (Neutral), the vehicle is free to move with either the automatic transmission in P (Park) or with the manual transmission in any driving gear. *[ST02650(B F )05/95] RWARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. *[ST02700( ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to protect your vehicle from theft. *[ST02800( ALL)05/95] If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, move the steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely. % *[ST02900( ALL)03/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s electrical accessories such as the radio and the windshield wipers to operate while the engine is not running. *[ST02950(B F )01/95] In order to turn the key from the ON or OFF position to the ACCESSORY position, you must push the key release button if your vehicle’s manual transmission gearshift is mounted on the floor. % 60 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST03025(BEF )03/91] *[ST03050(BEF )03/91] Ignition Key Buzzer or Chime *[ST03075( ALL)02/95] *[ST03100(B F )03/91] Removing the Key From the Ignition *[ST03115(B F )05/91] If you have a manual transmission, you have a key release lever which allows you to remove your key from the ignition. The key release lever is on the upper right of the steering column, just above the key lock cylinder. The lever says PUSH. % The buzzer or chime will sound if you open the driver’s door while the key is in the ignition. Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key in the ignition. Procedures for removing your key from the ignition will vary, depending on the type of gearshift your vehicle has. Gearshift levers may be mounted on the steering column or on the floor or console. *[ST03120(B F )05/91] quarter page art:0020833-A Key release lever *[ST03300(B F )03/91] If your vehicle’s gearshift lever is mounted on the column: *[ST03400( ALL)03/95] *[ST03500( ALL)03/91] 1. Put the gearshift in Park. 2. Set the parking brake fully before removing your foot from the service brake. (This will avoid “binding” or “loading” the park gear if you park on a grade.) *[ST03600( ALL)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 61 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST03700( ALL)03/95] *[ST03800(B F )03/91] 4. Remove the key. *[ST03950(B F )03/95] *[ST04000(B F )03/91] *[ST04100(B F )05/91] 1. Put the gearshift in 1 (First). 2. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 3. Set the parking brake fully before removing your foot from the service brake. *[ST04200(B F )06/92] *[ST04300(B F )10/90] *[ST04400(B F )03/95] *[ST04600(B F )05/95] 4. Push and hold in the key release button. 5. Turn the key to LOCK. 6. Remove the key. If your vehicle’s gearshift lever is mounted on the floor: RWARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). [ST04635(B F )05/95] With the transfer case in N (Neutral), the vehicle is free to move with either the automatic transmission in P (Park) or with the manual transmission in any driving gear. *[ST04650(B F )05/95] RWARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. 62 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST04750( ALL)01/93] RWARNING Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe and possibly fatal injuries to people as well as animals. *[ST04800( ALL)03/95] *[ST04900(BEF )03/95] % Fuel-Injected Engines When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most important thing to remember is to avoid pressing down on the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have problems getting your vehicle started. See Starting Your Engine in this chapter for details about when to use the accelerator while you start your vehicle. *[ST05000(B F )01/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. If you ever disconnect the battery, install a new battery, or experience a dead battery, you must allow the computer to “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will idle at its best. To let the engine do this, apply the parking brake, put the gearshift in Park (automatic transmission) or Neutral (manual transmission), turn off all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Let the engine idle for at least one minute. *[ST05100(BEF )03/95] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle is relearned. Your vehicle will eventually relearn its idle while you drive it, but it takes much longer than if you use the previous procedure. 63 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 [ST05150( ALL)02/95] Starting your vehicle *[ST05200( ALL)05/94] *[ST05300( ALL)05/95] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle % RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for more than a short period of time with the engine running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for more instructions. *[ST05400( ALL)01/95] *[ST05500(BEF )01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following: 1. Make sure you and all your passengers buckle your safety belts. See Safety Restraints in the Index for more details. *[ST05600( ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and other accessories are turned off when starting. *[ST05700(B F )10/94] 3. If you have an automatic transmission, make sure that the gearshift lever is in P (Park) and the parking brake is set before you turn the key. *[ST05800(B F )03/91] 4. If you have a manual transmission, make sure that the parking brake is fully set, push the clutch pedal to the floor, and put the gearshift into Neutral before you turn the key. (Remember, the starter will operate only if the clutch pedal is pushed in all the way). *[ST05900(BEF )03/95] *[ST06015(BEF )03/95] Testing the Warning Lights *[ST06025(BEF )03/95] If your Brake Warning Light does light up with the key in the ON position, you may not have Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lights on the instrument panel to make sure that they work. Refer to the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter. 64 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 fully released the parking brake or the brake fluid may be low. *[ST06200( ALL)02/95] *[ST06300( ALL)02/95] *[ST06400( ALL)05/95] Starting Your Engine 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section. *[ST06425( ALL)03/95] *[ST06451(BEF )03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting your engine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle is parked. *[ST06475( ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON position after the engine has started. % *[ST06501( ALL)02/95] To start your engine: If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering wheel slightly because it may be binding. *[ST06510( ALL)04/95] *[ST06515( ALL)04/95] For a cold engine: *[ST06520( ALL)04/95] ❑ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the *[ST06525( ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not hold the key in the START position % ❑ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine does not start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. engine does not start in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. for more than fifteen (15) seconds at a time. 65 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST06550( ALL)04/95] *[ST06551( ALL)04/95] For a warm engine: *[ST06575( ALL)04/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter or flood the engine. *[ST06601( ALL)04/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a few seconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal and drive away in the normal manner. *[ST06625( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature. This feature prevents you from shifting from P (Park) unless you have the brake pedal depressed. (The ignition must be in the ON position.) If you cannot shift from P (Park) with the brake pedal depressed: *[ST06627( ALL)01/95] *[ST06629( ALL)01/95] *[ST06631( ALL)01/95] 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Remove the key. 3. Insert the key and rotate one position clockwise (ignition in the OFF position). *[ST06633( ALL)01/95] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). (If the vehicle is shifted to P (Park), you must repeat the previous steps.) *[ST06635( ALL)01/95] *[ST06637( ALL)05/95] 5. Start the vehicle. % ❑ Do not hold the key in the START position for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start within five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then try again. If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please 66 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Bronco in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses. *[ST06640( ALL)05/95] RWARNING DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING. *[ST06775( ALL)03/95] *[ST06800( ALL)03/95] For cold or warm engines: *[ST06825( ALL)04/95] *[ST06851( ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it. *[ST06876( ALL)04/95] *[ST06900( ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position. 4. Release the ignition key when the engine starts. *[ST06925( ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up. Then drive away in the normal manner. *[ST06951( ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. For directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter. *[ST07300(BEF )05/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs higher than when it’s warmed up. These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle move slightly faster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow down after a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked. If the engine still does not start after two attempts: 67 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST07350( ALL)05/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle checked. *[ST07400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. *[ST07450( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. *[ST07500(BEF )03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero temperatures, use an engine block heater (if your vehicle has this option). % Engine Block Heater (If equipped) (Standard in Canada) *[ST07700(BEF )03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows the heater-defrost system to respond quickly. *[ST08000(BEF )05/95] RWARNING *[ST07600(BEF )03/95] To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. 68 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST08100(BEF )03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before you start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not damage the engine, so you can plug it in at night to start your vehicle the following morning. *[ST08150(BEF )12/91] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine block heater before driving your vehicle. % If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision *[ST08170(BEF )04/95] *[ST08190( ALL)03/95] Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch *[ST08200( ALL)03/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switch by hand before you can start your vehicle. *[ST08160( ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after a collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. *[ST08210(B F )03/95] one third page art:0020005-C Fuel pump shut-off switch location 69 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST08260( ALL)05/95] RWARNING If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try to start your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of the vehicle and call the local fire department or a towing service. *[ST08270( ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after a collision or substantial jolt: *[ST08280( ALL)04/95] *[ST08290( ALL)03/95] *[ST08300( ALL)03/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel. 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red reset button down. If the button is already set, you may have a different mechanical problem. *[ST08310(BEF )03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for a few seconds, then turn it to the OFF position. *[ST08330( ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If you do not see or smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle again. *[ST08340( ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving your vehicle. *[ST08350(BEF )03/95] quarter page art:0020107-A Reset button for fuel pump shut-off switch 70 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST09300( ALL)02/95] *[ST09400( ALL)02/95] % *[ST09500( ALL)05/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for more than a short period of time with the engine running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for more instructions. *[ST09600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. [ST09800(B )06/92] Make sure your Bronco’s tailgate window is closed when your truck is running to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn in. If you must have the tailgate window open, adjust your air control system to force outside air into the front of your truck. If your Bronco has outside air control vents, open them fully. *[ST09900( ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: *[ST10000( ALL)02/95] *[ST10100( ALL)02/95] *[ST10200( ALL)01/95] *[ST10300( ALL)01/95] ❑ your vehicle is raised for service ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes ❑ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris. 71 File:ltstb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:44 1995 *[ST10400( ALL)03/95] If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in outside air. *[ST10600(B F )03/91] ❑ HEATING — Set fan speed at MEDIUM or *[ST10800(B F )03/91] ❑ AIR CONDITIONING — Set the fan speed at HIGH, the function selector knob on VENT, FLOOR, MIX, or the DEFROST symbol and the temperature control knob on any desired position. MEDIUM or HIGH, the function selector knob on NORM or VENT and the temperature control knob on any desired position. 72 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 Warning Lights and Gauges *[LG00400( ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is divided into several different sections. The illustrations on the following pages show the major parts of the instrument panel that are described in this chapter. Some items shown may not be on all vehicles. *[LG00500(B F )02/95] *[LG00600(B F )11/89] *[LG00700(B F )11/89] *[LG00900(B F )12/89] Your vehicle has one of the following clusters: ❑ A mechanical cluster ❑ A mechanical cluster with tachometer If you are not sure which cluster your vehicle has, check the diagrams on the following pages of this section. 73 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG02200(B F )05/95] full page art:0020036-K Mechanical cluster 74 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG02400(B F )05/95] full page art:0020038-N Mechanical cluster with tachometer 75 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG03000( ALL)06/94] *[LG03100( ALL)06/93] The Mechanical Cluster The following warning lights and gauges are on the mechanical cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you to possible problems with your vehicle. Some of the lights listed are optional. The following sections detail what each of these indicators means. *[LG03200( ALL)03/95] *[LG03300(B M)03/95] Brake System Warning Light *[LG03400( ALL)05/94] This light comes on when you turn the ignition key to START to verify that the indicator bulb is working. If the light stays on or comes on after you have released the parking brake fully, have the hydraulic brake system serviced. *[LG03500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING The warning light for the brakes can show two things — that the parking brake is not fully released, or that the brake fluid level is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is low, the brake system should be checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician. The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not be working properly. Have the brakes checked immediately. *[LG03600( ALL)11/89] one inch art:0020044-A Brake warning light symbols 76 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG03800(BEF )02/95] *[LG03925(BEF )03/03] Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light *[LG03950(BEF )06/94] NOTE: If it does not glow momentarily, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked immediately. *[LG03985(BEF )07/94] NOTE: If the ABS brake warning light begins to flash in a repeatable flash sequence, check the rear anti-lock system continuous power fuse and brake lights for proper operation. To check the amber ABS brake warning light turn the ignition key to ON. The ABS brake warning light should glow momentarily. [LG04050(BEF )05/95] one inch art:0020913-B Anti-lock warning light symbol *[LG04100(BEF )05/95] RWARNING If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on or comes on while driving, have the braking system checked by a qualified service technician as soon as possible. *[LG04125(BEF )05/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brake warning light is not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled but normal brake function remains operational. 77 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG04150(BEF )02/95] *[LG04301(BEF )03/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime *[LG04325(BEF )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is not buckled when the key *[LG04351(BEF )02/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is *[LG04365(BEF )05/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled before the This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safety belt. The following conditions will take place: is turned to the ON position, the light comes on for 1 to 2 minutes and the chime sounds for 4 to 8 seconds. on and the chime is sounding, both the light and chime turn off. ignition is turned to the ON position, neither the light nor the chime will come on. *[LG04400( ALL)10/92] one inch art:0020046-B Safety belt warning light symbol *[LG04500( ALL)03/95] *[LG04525( ALL)05/95] Check Engine Warning Light The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consists of the hardware and software necessary to monitor the operation of the powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control system during normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, the Check Engine Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on. 78 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG04550( ALL)05/95] one inch art:0020048-A Check engine warning light symbol *[LG04575( ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefully installed. Do not install these devices by tapping into or running wires close to powertrain control system wires or components. *[LG04600( ALL)05/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON, but it should turn off when the engine starts. If the light does not come on when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with one of the vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in. *[LG04625( ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine is misfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the engine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in. *[LG04650( ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you are driving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the condition corrected itself. 79 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG04675( ALL)05/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself occurs when an engine running out of fuel begins to misfire. In this case, the Check Engine Warning Light may turn on and will then set a Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel was being consumed. After refueling, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off after the vehicle has completed three consecutive warm up cycles without a misfire condition occurring. A warm up cycle consists of engine start from a cold condition (engine at ambient temperature) and running until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. *[LG04700( ALL)05/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is not necessary to have the engine serviced. *[LG04725( ALL)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine Warning Light may come on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the Check Engine Warning Light comes on and you suspect that the fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off the engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap, making sure it is properly seated. *[LG04750( ALL)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm up cycles and on the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Light should turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourth engine restart, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician. 80 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG05900( ALL)01/95] *[LG06000( ALL)03/95] Charging System Light This light, shown as a battery symbol on your cluster, indicates that your battery is not being charged and that you need to have the electrical system checked. *[LG06050( ALL)03/91] one inch art:0020777-A The charging system light *[LG06100( ALL)05/95] This light comes on every time you turn the ignition to the ON or START position (engine off). The light should go off when the engine starts and the alternator begins to charge. *[LG06300(B FM)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running, have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. *[LG06305(BEF )06/93] Supplemental Air Bag Readiness Light and Tone Generator *[LG06310(BEF )06/93] This light illuminates for six seconds when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash, remains on, or if a series of five beeps is heard, have the system serviced as soon as possible. [LG06320(B F )05/95] one inch art:0000653-C Supplemental air bag readiness light 81 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG06400( ALL)05/94] *[LG06601( ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (Voltmeter) *[LG06700( ALL)11/89] If you are running electrical accessories (when the engine is off, or idling at a low speed), the pointer may move toward the lower end of the normal band. If it stays outside the normal band area, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as it is safely possible. *[LG06701( ALL)05/95] If the battery is operating under cold weather conditions, the pointer may indicate in the upper range of the NORMAL band while the battery is charging. If you are running electrical accessories with the engine off or idling at a low speed, or the battery is not fully charged, the pointer may move toward the lower end of the NORMAL band. *[LG06750( ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as it is safely possible. This gauge shows you the battery voltage when the ignition key is in the ON position. *[LG06900(B F )03/93] quarter page art:0020052-D Battery voltage gauge 82 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG07500( ALL)05/94] *[LG07601( ALL)06/93] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge *[LG07701( ALL)03/95] *[LG07801( ALL)01/95] *[LG07901( ALL)04/95] If you lose engine oil pressure: This gauge indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not the oil level. However, if your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oil pressure. With the engine running, the pointer should move into the NORMAL band. If the pointer drops below the NORMAL band while the engine is running, you have lost oil pressure and continued operation will cause severe engine damage. 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible. 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe engine damage could result. *[LG08001( ALL)02/95] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the instructions on checking and adding engine oil. Refer to Engine oil in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. To assure an accurate reading, your vehicle should be on level ground. *[LG08051( ALL)03/93] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as necessary before you start the engine again. Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine if the pointer is below the NORMAL band, regardless of the oil level. Contact your nearest dealer for further service actions. *[LG08200(B F )03/93] quarter page art:0020057-D Engine oil pressure gauge 83 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG08900( ALL)01/95] *[LG09001( ALL)03/95] High Beam Light This light comes on when the headlamps are turned on high beam or when you flash the lights. *[LG09025( ALL)11/89] one inch art:0020537-B High beam indicator light *[LG09300(BEF )03/95] *[LG09400(BEF )03/95] “Headlamps On” Alert Chime *[LG09500( ALL)01/95] *[LG09700( ALL)06/93] Fuel Gauge *[LG09860( ALL)06/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion. *[LG09875( ALL)08/93] With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gauge indicator may drift from the ignition switch ON position. This chime will sound if you open the door while the headlamps or parklamps are on. The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank only when the ignition switch is ON. *[LG10125(B F )06/93] quarter page art:0020691-C Fuel gauge 84 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG11100( ALL)01/95] *[LG11201( ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge *[LG11301( ALL)02/95] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into the Normal band as the engine coolant warms up. It is acceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within the Normal band under normal driving conditions. Under certain driving conditions, such as heavy stop and go traffic or driving up hills in hot weather, the pointer may indicate at the top of the Normal band. *[LG11401( ALL)05/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above the NORMAL band, the engine coolant is overheating and continued operation may cause engine damage. *[LG11501( ALL)01/95] *[LG11601( ALL)03/95] If your engine coolant overheats: 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible. *[LG11701( ALL)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon as safely possible, severe engine damage could result. *[LG11801( ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE COOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL THE ENGINE IS COOL. *[LG11901( ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions on checking and adding coolant to your engine, see Engine Coolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. *[LG12200( ALL)03/95] For instructions on checking and adding coolant to your engine, see Engine coolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. This gauge tells you the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the gauge indicator will not be accurate. 85 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG12350(B F )03/93] quarter page art:0020535-D Engine coolant temperature gauge *[LG12601( ALL)01/95] *[LG12700( ALL)01/95] Speedometer *[LG12750(BEF )04/95] Your vehicle contains a speedometer which receives its input from the Anti-Lock brake sensor. The speedometer is also used to provide a speed signal for correct operation of the vehicle’s Powertrain Control Module (PCM), electronic transmission, and speed control (if so equipped). Because of this, it is very IMPORTANT to change the speedometer’s internal conversion constant if the size of the tires on the vehicle is changed. Changing the conversion constant to the proper value when the tires are changed will also ensure that the speedometer retains the original factory-set accuracy. NOTE: The conversion constant can only be changed six times once the vehicle leaves the factory. Your Ford dealership service personnel can change the conversion constant. *[LG12753(BEF )01/95] Some vehicles are equipped with a vehicle speed (MPH/km/h) limiting device that is contained within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The purpose of this device is to maintain peak vehicle speed below a specified limit. (Vehicle speed limits may vary based on engine displacement). The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving. 86 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG12756(B F )05/95] If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out” condition at high speeds, it may be the result of this limiting device. It is a normal condition and can be avoided by reducing vehicle/engine speed. *[LG12770(B F )03/93] one third page art:0020871-C Speedometer *[LG13130( ALL)10/92] *[LG13160( ALL)10/92] Odometer/Trip Odometer The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) odometer is a combination trip odometer and total odometer. The total odometer is normally displayed. To see the trip odometer, press and release the “Select” button on the upper right side of the speedometer. To zero out the trip odometer, press and release the “Reset” button on the upper left side of the speedometer while the trip odometer is displayed. If the trip odometer is displayed, press and release the “Select” button to return the display to the total odometer value. 87 File:ltlgb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:30:26 1995 *[LG13200(B F )05/95] *[LG13300(B F )05/95] Tachometer (If equipped) *[LG13400(B F )05/95] The tachometer may move slightly when the key is placed in the ACC or ON position, with the engine off. This is normal and does not affect the performance of the tachometer when the engine is running. *[LG13525(B F )05/95] Some vehicles are equipped with an engine speed (RPM) limiting device contained within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The purpose of this device is to maintain peak engine speed (RPM) below a specified limit. This feature is only evident on automatic transmission vehicles when shifting manually (1, 2, D) and on all manual transmission units. (Engine speed limits may vary based on engine displacement). *[LG13550(B F )05/95] If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out” condition at high speeds, it may be the result of this limiting device. It is a normal condition and can be avoided by reducing vehicle/engine speed. The tachometer will show you the engine’s speed measured in revolutions per minute (RPM). *[LG13665(B F )05/95] one third page art:0020869-C Tachometer 88 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 [IP00485(B )12/91] full page art:0020026-F Instrument Panel Controls Instrument Panel and Controls 89 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP00500(BEF )01/95] *[IP00601(BEF )12/91] *[IP00801(BEF )10/93] *[IP00950(B F )04/95] The Climate Control Systems Your vehicle is equipped with a control assembly designed to handle either a combination A/C-Heater System or a Heater-Only System. Instrument Panel Registers There are four registers in the instrument panel. Each of these registers contain a louver assembly which can be manually adjusted to direct airflow up, down, left, right, and positive shut-off. An illustration of the register locations follows. *[IP01300(B F )03/93] quarter page art:0020101-C Instrument panel registers *[IP01400(B F )02/95] *[IP01450(B F )02/95] Air Conditioner and Heater (If equipped) The control for your air conditioning and heater system is located at the center of the instrument panel below the radio and will operate only when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. Your air conditioner and heater will heat and/or cool your vehicle interior depending on the function position and temperature you select. The function selector control knob allows you to select heating or cooling and determine where the air will be directed. The temperature control knob setting determines the temperature of the air that flows into the vehicle. 90 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP01475(B )05/94] one third page art:0020104-D Climate control knobs (Heater A/C system) *[IP01476(B F )03/95] To turn your air conditioner and heater system on, select any position except OFF. This will turn the fan on and allow airflow into the vehicle. To turn your air conditioner and heater off, select OFF. This will turn the fan off and stop airflow from coming into the vehicle. *[IP01477(B F )03/95] *[IP01478(B F )05/94] Temperature selection *[IP01479(B F )03/95] *[IP01480(B F )05/94] H Fan speed adjustment The temperature knob is the rotating knob located at the center of of the control with tapered RED and BLUE bands surrounding most of the knob. The wide RED part of the band (full right) is the heat or warmer area. The wide BLUE area (full left) is the cooling or cool temperature area. Any position selected between full right and full left will give a temperature between the two extreme temperatures. The H knob on the control is the fan speed knob which controls the volume of air flow. Rotate the H knob to the right to increase the amount of air entering the vehicle. Four fan speed positions are available and are indicated by LO, two separate dots and HI beside the H control knob. The HI position provides the most air flow. 91 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP01481(B F )08/94] *[IP01482(B F )03/95] Airflow selections [IP01483(B F )02/95] Use VENT to bring outside air through the instrument panel registers. You can heat the air in this position by rotating the center knob into the RED area. The air CANNOT be cooled below the outside temperature regardless of the center knob setting. Select NORM A/C or MAX A/C to get cool air through the instrument panel registers. [IP01484(B F )03/95] NORM A/C *[IP01485(B F )02/95] Select NORM A/C to get refrigerated outside air through the instrument panel registers. The A/C position is used for cooling except when it is extremely hot or fast cooling of the vehicle is needed. Then, select MAX A/C for fast cooling and return to NORM A/C when you are comfortable. *[IP01486(B F )03/95] *[IP01487(B F )04/95] MAX A/C *[IP01488(B F )03/95] *[IP01489(B F )05/94] FLOOR VENT The MAX A/C position produces cool air more rapidly to provide faster cooling of your vehicle. This is possible because cooler air is drawn from inside the passenger area and refrigerated again instead of using warmer outside air. Using inside air will also make the fan sound louder which is normal when using MAX A/C. The air flow will be from the instrument panel registers. Air flow will be to the floor when FLOOR is selected. The air cannot be cooled in the FLOOR position but can be heated by rotating the center knob in the RED area. 92 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP01490(B F )03/95] *[IP01491(B F )05/94] *[IP01492(B F )03/95] [IP01493(B F )05/95] MIX Select MIX to get air to the floor and windshield defrosters at the same time. If the outside temperature is about 50˚ (10˚C) or warmer, the air will also be dehumidified to remove moisture. This feature will help prevent fogging in humid weather. The air can be cooled or heated. V DEF Select V DEF to obtain maximum air flow to the windshield. Rotate the center knob into the RED area for the air temperature required to defrost. When the outside air temperature is about 50˚F (9˚C) or warmer, the air will be dehumidified to remove moisture. The air can be cooled or heated. Rotate the H knob on the left to increase the air flow. *[IP01494(B F )05/94] *[IP01495(B F )02/95] Operating Tips *[IP01496(B F )05/95] ❑ In humid weather, select V DEF. This will *[IP01497(B F )05/94] ❑ To prevent humidity buildup inside your [IP01498(B F )05/95] ❑ Do not put objects under the front seats that The following tips will help you to get the most satisfaction from your air conditioning and heater system. help to prevent windshield fogging. After a few minutes of operation, you may select another air flow position. Rotate the control knob to obtain your desired comfort level. vehicle, always drive with the Air Conditioning and Heater System turned on. will interfere with the flow of air under the seats to the back seat area of your vehicle. 93 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP01499(B F )05/94] ❑ Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air *[IP01500(B F )05/94] *[IP01505(B F )05/94] Standard Heater intake area of your Air Conditioner and Heater System which could block the air intake. The intake area is located at the bottom of the windshield. The control for your Heater system is located in the center of the instrument panel below the radio and will operate only when the ignition key is turned to the RUN position. Your Heater will heat and/or ventilate your vehicle interior depending on the Function and temperature you select. The Function Selector knob allows you to select heating or ventilation and determine where the air will be directed. The Temperature knob setting determines the temperature of the air that flows into the vehicle. *[IP01510(B F )05/94] one third page art:0020096-D *[IP01515(B F )05/95] To turn your Heater system on, select any position except OFF. This will turn the fan ON and allow air flow into the vehicle. Select OFF to turn your Heater off. This will turn the fan off and stop outside air from coming into the vehicle. 94 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP01520(B F )03/95] *[IP01525(B F )02/95] Temperature selection *[IP01530(B F )03/95] *[IP01535(B F )05/94] H Fan speed adjustment The Temperature knob is the rotating knob located at the center of the control with tapered RED and BLUE bands surrounding most of the knob. The wide RED part of the band (full right) is the heat or warmer area. The wide BLUE area (full left) is the cool or unheated temperature area. Any position selected between full right and full left will give a temperature between the two extreme temperatures. The cool temperature you select will not be cooler than the outside temperature. The H knob on the control is the fan speed knob which controls the volume of air flow. Rotate the H knob to the right to increase fan speed and increase the amount of of air entering the vehicle. Four fan speed positions are available and are indicated by LO, two separate dots and HI beside the H control knob. The HI position provides the most air flow. *[IP01540(B F )03/95] *[IP01542(B F )03/95] *[IP01545(B F )02/95] Air flow selections *[IP01550(B F )03/95] *[IP01555(B F )05/94] FLOOR VENT Use VENT to bring outside air through the instrument panel registers. You can heat the air in this position by rotating the temperature knob into the RED area. The air CANNOT be cooled below the outside temperature regardless of the temperature knob setting. Air flow will be to the floor when FLOOR is selected. The air can be heated by rotating the temperature knob into the RED area. 95 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP01560(B F )03/95] *[IP01563(B F )05/94] *[IP01565(B F )03/95] *[IP01570(B F )04/95] *[IP01575(B F )05/94] *[IP01580(B F )02/95] [IP01585(B F )04/95] MIX Select MIX to get air to the floor and windshield defrosters at the same time. V DEF Select V DEF to obtain maximum air flow to the windshield. Rotate the temperature knob into the RED area for the air temperature required to defrost. Rotate the H knob to increase or decrease the air flow. Operating Tips The following tips will help you to get the most satisfaction from your heater system. ❑ In humid weather, select V DEF. This will help to prevent windshield fogging. After a few minutes, you may select another airflow position. *[IP01587(B F )02/95] ❑ To prevent humidity buildup inside your [IP01590(B F )02/95] ❑ Do not put objects under the front seats that vehicle, always drive with the heater system turned on. will interfere with the flow of air under the seats to the back seat area of your vehicle. *[IP01595(B F )02/95] ❑ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air intake area at the bottom of the windshield. 96 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP03901(B F )05/94] one third page art:0020096-D Climate control knobs (heater only) *[IP12300(B )08/93] Rear Window Defroster (If equipped) (Standard in Canada) *[IP12400(B )12/91] The defroster for the rear window clears frost, fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside of the rear window. *[IP12550(B )04/95] The control switch is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering column. [IP12650(B )05/91] quarter page art:0020887-A Rear window defroster switch *[IP12800(B )02/95] *[IP12900(B )02/95] *[IP13000(B )02/95] *[IP13150(B )03/95] To defrost the rear window: 1. Clear any snow from the rear window. 2. Get in your vehicle and start the engine. 3. Press the switch. The indicator light should turn on. 97 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP13300(B )02/05] The defroster turns off automatically after approximately 10 minutes. If the window is not clear, turn on the defroster again. It will also automatically shut off any time the engine is shut off. % NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or window cleaners with abrasives to clean the inside of your rear window. If you do, you may damage the heating elements that are bonded to the inside of the rear window and cause damage to the rear window defroster. *[IP16800(BEF )01/95] *[IP16900( ALL)01/95] *[IP17000( ALL)02/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights Turning On the Exterior Lights *[IP17100( ALL)06/94] 1. Pull the headlamp control knob toward you to the first position. Parking lamps, tail lamps and marker lamps are now on. *[IP17200( ALL)06/94] 2. Pull the headlamp control knob toward you to the outer position. Headlamps are now on in addition to the above. *[IP17250(BEF )02/95] 3. Rotate the knob when it is in an on position to brighten or dim the instrument panel lamps. Rotate fully counterclockwise to operate courtesy and cargo lamps. *[IP13400(B )03/94] To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, marker lamps, and tail lamps, use the headlamp switch to the left of the steering column. 98 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP17260(B FM)10/92] half page art:0020122-F Headlamp switch *[IP17400(BEF )05/95] *[IP17500(BEF )05/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps *[IP17815( ALL)01/95] *[IP17820( ALL)03/95] *[IP17830( ALL)03/95] Daytime Running Light System *[IP17835( ALL)03/95] ❑ The headlamp system is in the OFF position, *[IP17840( ALL)03/95] *[IP17850( ALL)01/95] ❑ The vehicle is running, and ❑ The vehicle has a fully released parking % Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches or crack the lamps. (Canadian vehicles only) The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turns the high beam headlamps on, with a reduced light output, when: and brake. 99 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP17875( ALL)01/95] NOTE: You may notice that the lights flicker when the vehicle is turned on or off. This is a normal condition. *[IP17890(BEF )05/95] RWARNING The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system will not illuminate the tail lamps and parking lamps. Turn on your headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a collision. *[IP17900(BEF )03/95] Lighting Up the Instrument Panel and the Interior of Your Vehicle *[IP18000(BEF )03/95] The instrument panel lights can be turned on by pulling the headlamp switch toward you to either the first or outer position. You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by rotating the headlamp switch knob. *[IP18400(BEF )03/95] *[IP18700(BE )12/91] Cargo, Courtesy and Dome Lamps % Rear cargo lamps, equipped with an ON/OFF/DOOR switch will light when the doors are closed and the switch is in the ON position. *[IP19000(BE )05/95] quarter page art:0020125-B Rear cargo lamp with rear headliner *[IP19175(B F )05/90] The interior/courtesy lamp is automatically turned on when the driver or passenger door is opened. Turning the headlamp switch fully counterclockwise will operate the interior lamp when the doors are closed. 100 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP19185(B F )05/95] quarter page art:0020695-A Interior/Courtesy lamp *[IP19190(B F )05/95] Combination Cargo and High-Mount Brakelamp *[IP19200(B F )05/95] The combination cargo/high-mount brakelamp is located outside the vehicle, directly over the rear window. Use the headlamp control switch to turn on the cargo lamp and interior courtesy lights. [IP19375(B )07/93] quarter page art:0021013-B Cargo/High-mount brakelamp *[IP19400(B F )05/91] RWARNING Do not drive your vehicle with the cargo/courtesy light on. Showing a white light to the rear while driving on public roads is illegal in some places. 101 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP19705(B F )07/94] Turning On the Dome/Map Reading Lamps (If equipped) *[IP19805(B F )07/94] The map lamps are located inside the dome light assembly, on each side of the dome light. Each lamp has its own switch. [IP19820(B )03/93] If you have the Bronco Eddie Bauer, the map lamps are located in the overhead console. Each lamp has its own switch. [IP19885(B )05/94] one third page art:0021077-B Map lamps — Eddie Bauer only *[IP19900(B F )05/94] quarter page art:0020127-B Map lamps 102 File:ltipb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:43 1995 *[IP20060(BEF )04/95] *[IP20070(BEF )04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens *[IP20075(BEF )04/95] *[IP20080(BEF )04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps % % Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft cloth and a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not use paper towel or an abrasive cleaner to clean the lens as these may cause scratches. Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic and should be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear water. 103 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 Steering Column Controls *[SC00400( ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed to give you easy access to the controls while you are driving. *[SC00500( ALL)01/95] *[SC00600( ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steering column to: *[SC00700( ALL)03/95] *[SC00800(BEF )01/95] *[SC00900(BEF )01/95] *[SC01000(BEF )01/95] ❑ operate the turn signals and cornering lamps ❑ turn the high beams on/off ❑ flash the lights ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washer *[SC01100( ALL)01/95] *[SC01200( ALL)03/95] Turn Signals *[SC01400( ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move the lever back to the center (off) position. on/off Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash. 105 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC01700( ALL)01/94] one third page art:0020081-C Turn signal lever and functions *[SC01800( ALL)11/89] If the turn indicator light in the instrument panel does not illuminate or remains on (doesn’t flash) when you signal a turn, the turn signaling system is malfunctioning. Have this condition corrected as soon as possible, but make sure that you use the accepted hand signals in the meantime. *[SC03200( ALL)03/95] *[SC03300( ALL)05/95] High Beams *[SC03400( ALL)03/95] To turn off the high beams, pull the lever toward you until it latches. The high beam indicator light turns off. To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp control knob to the headlamp ON position and push the turn signal lever away from you until it latches. When the high beams are ON, the high beam indicator light on the instrument panel comes on. 106 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC03800( ALL)03/95] one third page art:0020074-B Headlamp high beam switch and turn signal lever *[SC04200( ALL)05/95] *[SC04300( ALL)05/95] Flashing the Lights *[SC04400( ALL)03/95] *[SC04500( ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward you for a moment and then release it. The headlamps will flash whether the headlamp knob is on or off. To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition key must be turned to the ON or ACC position. *[SC04600( ALL)03/95] Turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever toward the front of the vehicle. You can turn it to either the LO or HI speed position. *[SC04700( ALL)03/95] *[SC04800( ALL)03/95] Variable Interval Wipers In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle is equipped with wipers that you can set to operate at varying intervals. For example, you can set the interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles or more often in heavier rain. 107 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC04950( ALL)10/92] one third page art:0020831-A Interval wiper on turn signal lever *[SC05000( ALL)02/95] To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at the end of the turn signal lever toward or away from the instrument panel to the interval operation you desire. *[SC05100( ALL)04/95] *[SC05200( ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer *[SC05300( ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluid container is empty or activate the washers at any time for more than 15 seconds continuously. This could damage the washer pump system. To clean the windshield, push in the end of the wiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knob pushed in. After you release the knob, the wipers operate for two to three cycles before turning off (if wipers were off) or returning to HI, LO, or the interval setting selected. 108 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC05400( ALL)01/93] RWARNING In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision. Always warm up the windshield with the defroster before you use the washer fluid. If you cannot see through the windshield clearly, it can increase the risk of being involved in a collision. *[SC05500(BEF )04/95] For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacing your windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index. *[SC05510( ALL)03/95] *[SC05520( ALL)04/95] Hazard Flasher % The hazard flasher is used to alert other drivers to hazardous situations. *[SC05527(BE )10/94] The flashers will flash and the high-mount brakelamp will stay on steadily (not flash) with the brake pedal depressed. *[SC05530( ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle is running or not. The flashers work for up to two hours when the battery is fully charged and in good condition without draining the battery excessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or if the battery is not fully charged, the battery can be drained. *[SC05540( ALL)09/93] *[SC05550( ALL)10/92] To use the hazard flasher: 1. Push in the flasher button; it will pop out and the lamps will begin to flash. *[SC05560( ALL)10/92] 2. To stop the flashers, push in the flasher button again. *[SC05562( ALL)10/92] NOTE: The flasher button will be sticking up slightly higher when ON than when OFF. 109 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC05575(BEF )06/93] one third page art:0020075-B Hazard flasher *[SC05600( ALL)01/95] *[SC05800(BEF )05/95] *[SC06150(BEF )06/93] Horn To sound the horn, press either horn pad. one third page art:0020086-B Horn location (with speed control option) *[SC06200(BEF )05/95] *[SC06300(BEF )05/95] Tilt Steering (If equipped) RWARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. 110 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC06500(BEF )01/94] one third page art:0020089-C Turn signal and tilt release wheel lever *[SC06700( ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steering column/wheel, pull the release lever on the column toward you. Tip the steering wheel to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. *[SC07250( ALL)12/89] Be sure the steering wheel locks in a notch. It is not infinitely adjustable. Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. *[SC07300(BEF )03/91] *[SC07450( ALL)05/95] Speed Control (If equipped) *[SC07500( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle has speed control, so you can automatically maintain a constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h). The switches to operate the speed control are on the steering wheel. Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or in Canada the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) approved may cause the speed control to malfunction. Therefore, use only properly installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radio transmitting equipment in your vehicle. 111 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC07700(BEF )05/95] quarter page art:0020093-B The speed control switches *[SC07800( ALL)03/95] *[SC08000( ALL)03/95] *[SC08100( ALL)04/95] To set the speed control: 1. Press and release the ON switch. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above 30 mph (50 km/h) using the accelerator pedal. *[SC08400( ALL)03/95] 3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately to set your speed. If you keep this switch pressed, your speed will continue to increase. *[SC08500( ALL)03/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set. *[SC08600( ALL)01/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle may momentarily slow down or speed up, even though the speed control is on. This is normal. *[SC08640( ALL)04/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your set speed while driving in j (Overdrive) on a downhill grade, you may want to depress the transmission control switch located on the shift lever to turn off overdrive to reduce vehicle speed. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it goes above your set speed on a downhill grade. For the best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, leave the shift select in j (Overdrive), or resume as soon as practical. 112 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC08700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. *[SC08801( ALL)03/91] In mountainous areas, at higher elevations, or when pulling a trailer, the speed control may not be able to maintain the preset speed with the transmission in overdrive. *[SC08850(B F )06/92] If your vehicle comes with a 5-speed manual transmission, you may prefer to drive in 4 (Fourth) gear, in mountainous areas or at high altitudes, to improve speed control performance. *[SC09275(B F )12/91] In order to downshift (with a manual transmission) with the speed control operating, you must press either the brake or clutch pedal long enough to disengage the speed control. Wait a second before depressing the clutch again and making the shift so that the speed control can fully return to the idle position. *[SC09325( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not shift the transmission into N (Neutral) with the speed control on. *[SC09350( ALL)03/94] To maintain a preset speed under the above conditions, with electronically controlled transmissions — press the Transmission Control Switch. The indicator light will turn on and illuminate the word “OFF.” This will cancel “Overdrive”. You can press the Transmission Control Switch on or off at any speed. For the best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, press the Transmission Control Switch to turn off the light. This allows overdrive operation. 113 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC09375( ALL)05/95] quarter page art:0020771-C Transmission control switch and Indicator light % Accelerating With the Speed Control Operating *[SC09500( ALL)03/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up momentarily. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the set speed. *[SC09600( ALL)01/95] *[SC09700( ALL)03/95] Resetting the Speed Control *[SC09400( ALL)03/95] % To reset the speed control to a lower speed, press and hold the COAST switch. Let your vehicle slow down to the desired speed and release the COAST switch. *[SC09750( ALL)10/94] Your vehicle has a “tap-down” feature that allows you to decrease your current speed in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h) by a momentary tap of the COAST switch. Multiple taps of the COAST switch will decrease your vehicle speed 1 mph (1.6 km/h) for each tap. For example, if you are currently set at 65 mph (104 km/h) and tap the COAST switch 5 times your vehicle speed will decrease and set at 60 mph (96 km/h). *[SC09800( ALL)03/91] To reset the speed control to a higher speed, you can follow any of these procedures: *[SC10000( ALL)03/95] ❑ Accelerate to the desired speed using the accelerator pedal, then press the SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately. 114 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC10200( ALL)03/95] ❑ Press and hold the SET ACCEL switch until *[SC10250(BEF )10/94] ❑ TAP-UP — This allows you to increase your *[SC10300( ALL)12/91] *[SC10400( ALL)03/95] Turning the Speed Control Off *[SC10500( ALL)06/92] ❑ Press the OFF switch. The speed control is [SC10700(B F )04/95] ❑ Press the clutch pedal slightly [SC10750( ALL)04/95] ❑ Press the brake pedal slightly. The speed the vehicle accelerates to the desired speed, then release the switch. current speed in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h) by a momentary tap of the SET-ACCEL switch. Multiple taps of the SET-ACCEL switch will increase your vehicle speed 1 mph (1.6 km/h) for each tap. For example, if you are currently set at 60 mph (96 km/h) and tap the SET-ACCEL switch 5 times your vehicle speed will increase and set at 65 mph (104 km/h). You can cancel the speed control while you are driving. off. If you want to resume speed control, press the ON switch and reset the speed control by pressing the SET ACCEL button. (if equipped). The speed control is suspended, but you can reset it by pressing SET ACCEL or return to the previous set speed with the RESUME switch. control is suspended, but you can reset it by pressing SET ACCEL or return to the previous set speed with the RESUME switch. *[SC10800( ALL)04/95] In addition, the speed control is turned off each time you turn the vehicle off. 115 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC11100( ALL)11/89] *[SC11200( ALL)05/95] Driving uphill or on a steep grade *[SC11250( ALL)03/93] Frequent shifting of an automatic transmission or speed loss during speed control operation can be eliminated by shifting out of overdrive into drive (or by pressing the Transmission Control Switch, if equipped). These conditions could occur in hilly terrain or at higher elevations. *[SC11400( ALL)12/91] If the speed control “dropped out” after your climb is completed, the speed of your vehicle can be reset with the SET ACCEL switch, or returned to the previous set speed with the RESUME switch, as long as you are driving over 30 mph (48 km/h). When the speed control is on, your vehicle may significantly drop speed when driving uphill, especially with a heavy load. If the speed drops more than 8 to 14 mph (15 - 25 km/h) the automatic speed control will, by design, be canceled. You may have to temporarily resume manual speed control while driving up a steep grade in order to maintain the speed you desire. 116 File:ltscb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:29:08 1995 *[SC11500( ALL)03/95] *[SC11600( ALL)07/94] Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed *[SC11700( ALL)05/95] To resume the speed you had before, you must be driving at least 30 mph (50 km/h). *[SC11800( ALL)11/94] Press and release the RESUME switch. Your vehicle gradually returns to the previously set speed and then maintains it. % *[SC11850( ALL)03/95] If you press the brake pedal, the speed control is cancelled. You can return to the speed you set by using the RSM switch, as long as you did not press the OFF switch. RWARNING If your vehicle has speed control, do not use it on slippery roads. You could lose control of your vehicle and could injure someone. 117 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 Features *[FV00401(BEF )02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find out about standard and optional features. *[FV00601(BEF )01/95] % [FV01801(BEF )03/95] * *[FV01901(BEF )10/89] Doors Anti-theft front door lock knobs *[FV06001(B F )05/90] Tailgate [FV06101(B )05/90] To open the tailgate, first lower the tailgate window. [FV06201(B )05/90] Next, lift the latch handle from the inside tailgate panel of your vehicle, and lower the tailgate. [FV06300(B )05/90] To close the tailgate, lift it and push forward with enough force to latch the assembly securely in position. *[FV06601(B F )05/90] When open, the tailgate load should not exceed 500 lbs (227 kgs). If you want to load heavy items onto your vehicle, Ford recommends that you load them one at a time, directly on the bed floor to avoid damage to the tailgate or its supports. Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to preclude unlocking the door by pulling up on the bullet type lock knob. To unlock and open the front door from the inside of the vehicle, pull on the inside door handle. 119 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 [FV06701(B )05/90] For trucks with a swing away spare tire carrier, you must release the carrier and swing it out of the way before lowering the tailgate. See the following illustration. [FV06801(B )05/90] one third page art:0020193-B Bronco tailgate operation [FV06901(B )05/90] Latch lockout system for the tailgate [FV07001(B )05/90] The tailgate is equipped with a latch lockout system which prevents you from opening it unless the glass is completely down. The lockout also prevents the glass from being raised unless the tailgate is completely latched in the closed position. [FV07101(B )05/90] RWARNING When driving your vehicle make sure that the tailgate door and window are closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. 120 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 [FV07201(B )02/92] If you must drive with the rear window open: [FV07301(B )03/95] ❑ Adjust your climate control system to force outside air into your vehicle. [FV07401(B )02/92] ❑ Completely open the outside air vents if your vehicle is so equipped. [FV07501(B )02/92] ❑ You can prevent the tailgate from accidentally opening by raising the glass one inch from the fully opened position. *[FV14100(BEF )04/95] *[FV14500(BEF )05/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped) *[FV14701(BEF )03/91] The manual door locks will override the power door lock controls. The power door lock switches are located in the front doors. To lock all doors push the switch marked L. To unlock all doors push the switch marked U. *[FV15001(BEF )05/95] quarter page art:0020203-C Power door lock controls *[FV15301(BEF )02/95] Remote Entry System (If equipped) *[FV15401(BEF )06/94] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you can lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using a key. The remote also has a personal alarm feature. The buttons for the system are located on the two hand held transmitters that came with your vehicle. 121 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV15600(BEF )02/95] The system will work with up to four transmitters. Your vehicle came with two transmitters. Additional transmitters can be ordered from your dealer. *[FV15700(BEF )02/95] The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the OFF position. *[FV15800(BEF )04/94] quarter page art:0020788-A The remote entry transmitter % Unlocking the doors with the remote entry system *[FV16001(BEF )02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button. *[FV16101(BEF )02/95] To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCK button a second time within five (5) seconds of unlocking the driver’s door. *[FV16300(BEF )02/95] Locking the doors with the remote entry system [FV16500(B F )04/95] To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button. *[FV16600(B F )03/93] If you would like a signal that the doors are being locked, press the LOCK button again within five seconds. The door will lock again, the horn will beep, and the external lamps will flash. *[FV16800(BEF )02/95] *[FV16900(BEF )04/95] Remote entry personal alarm *[FV15901(BEF )02/95] % If you wish to activate the remote entry system personal alarm, press the PANIC button. This will honk the horn and flash the lights for 122 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 approximately 2 minutes 45 seconds. You can turn it OFF by pressing the PANIC button again from the same transmitter or by turning the ignition to the ON or ACCESSORY position. *[FV17000(BEF )02/95] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK or PANIC buttons, the illuminated entry system turns on the vehicle’s interior lights for 25 seconds. You can turn these lights off with the remote entry LOCK button or by turning the ignition to the ON or ACCESSORY position. *[FV17100(BEF )04/94] quarter page art:0060566-B *[FV17501(BEF )02/95] *[FV17601(BEF )02/95] Replacing the batteries *[FV17701(BEF )02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system can also be affected by weather conditions (such as very cold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 33 feet (10 meters) away from your vehicle. % The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin type three-volt lithium 2016 batteries (included) that should last for several years of normal use. If you notice a significant decrease in operating range, the batteries should be replaced. Replacement batteries can be purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 123 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV17801(BEF )03/93] quarter page art:0020789-A Opening the remote transmitter *[FV17901(BEF )02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace the batteries by twisting a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER APART. When installing the new batteries, be sure to place the positive (+) side down as marked. Snap the two halves back together. *[FV18001(BEF )02/95] quarter page art:0020790-A Replacing the batteries *[FV18101(BEF )02/95] *[FV18200(BEF )02/95] % Replacing lost transmitters In the event a transmitter is lost, you should take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer to have the remote entry system deprogrammed for the lost transmitter. This is necessary to prevent further unauthorized use of the lost transmitter. 124 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV18301(BEF )02/95] You can also purchase additional transmitters (up to 4 transmitters can be used) from your dealer. You will need to take all your transmitters to the dealer so they can program them to the remote entry system all at the same time. *[FV18601(BEF )04/95] Illuminated Entry System (If equipped) [FV18701(BEF )04/95] This system will provide illumination of the vehicle’s interior courtesy lamps when either outside front door handle is pulled or when the Remote Entry System is used to unlock the door or sound the Personal Alarm. The system will automatically turn off after approximately 25 seconds or when the ignition is turned to the START or ACCESSORY position. *[FV18801(BEF )04/94] NOTE: The inside lights will not turn off if you have turned them on with the dimmer knob or if any door is open. *[FV18900(B F )04/94] Battery Saver (with Remote Entry — If equipped) *[FV19000(B F )03/95] When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will turn off battery voltage to all of these lights after 40 minutes: glove box, engine compartment, overhead console, mirror, courtesy and interior (including cargo) lamps. *[FV19102(B F )03/95] This will prevent draining of the battery if these lights have been left on inadvertently or if a door is not completely closed. Battery voltage to these lamps will be restored when the remote entry transmitter is used, any door is opened, or the ignition key is turned on again. 125 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV19250(BEF )02/95] Windows [FV22000(B )05/90] Tailgate Window [FV22101(B )05/91] The switch to operate the tailgate window is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column next to the master lighting switch. With the ignition in the ON or ACC position, move the switch down to lower the window and move it up to raise the window. You can also operate the tailgate window by using the key from the outside of the tailgate. [FV22201(B )05/90] RWARNING When driving your vehicle make sure that the tailgate door and window are closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. [FV22301(B )02/92] If you must drive with the rear window open: [FV22401(B )03/95] ❑ Adjust your climate control system to force outside air into your vehicle. [FV22501(B )02/92] ❑ Completely open the outside air vents if your vehicle is so equipped. [FV22601(B )02/92] ❑ You can prevent the tailgate from accidentally opening by raising the glass one inch from the fully opened position. 126 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 [FV22701(B )03/91] quarter page art:0020215-B Rear window switch [FV22801(B )02/89] When driving in extremely dusty areas, clean the tailgate glass periodically to prevent build-up of surface dust. This will prevent excessive wear or damage to the tailgate window seals. *[FV22901(BEF )03/91] *[FV23001(BEF )05/90] Using the Power Windows (If equipped) *[FV23501(BEF )05/95] Each door has a power control that opens and closes the window on that door. The driver’s door has a master control switch that operates both front door windows. You must place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position to use your power window controls. RWARNING Do not let children play with the power windows. They may seriously hurt themselves. Make sure occupants are clear of the window(s) before closing. *[FV23800(BEF )05/95] quarter page art:0020203-C Master control switch 127 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV24101(BEF )01/95] *[FV24801(BEF )05/90] *[FV24901(BEF )08/94] *[FV25001(BEF )08/94] *[FV25101(BEF )10/89] *[FV25201(BEF )04/95] *[FV25301(BEF )04/89] Seats Adjusting the Front Seat Manually To move the front seat forward or rearward: 1. Find the adjustment lever at the lower left corner of the front seat. 2. Push the lever to the left to unlatch the seat. 3. Move the seat to the desired position. 4. Release the lever to latch the seat in its new position. Make sure the seat locks securely in place. *[FV25600(B F )03/91] one third page art:0020218-B Adjusting bucket seat *[FV25700(B F )05/95] one third page art:0020220-E Adjusting the bench seat 128 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV26001(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. *[FV26100(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. *[FV26200(BEF )05/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. *[FV26300(BEF )05/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, children should always ride with the seatback upright. *[FV26400(BEF )10/89] *[FV27301(BEF )02/92] Reclining Bucket Seats *[FV27401(B F )03/93] 1. On the outboard side of the seat, lift the recliner handle up and hold it in place. *[FV27501(BEF )10/89] 2. Lean against the back of the seat and adjust it to the position you want. *[FV27601(BEF )10/89] 3. Release the handle to lock the seat back in place. *[FV27701(BEF )10/89] 4. To return the seat back upright, lift the handle and lean forward. You can tilt the seat back of your bucket seats backward. 129 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV27800(B F )02/92] one third page art:0020222-B Reclining bucket seat *[FV28001(B F )10/90] Lifting the seat-back adjustment lever of an unoccupied seat will allow the seat back to fold forward for access to the rear. Pushing the seat back backward with the handle released returns the seat upright. *[FV30501(B F )01/89] Seat Back Release (Bench Seat) [FV30801(B )12/91] The split back bench seat can be folded forward on either side to gain access to the rear of the vehicle. To do so, push up the latch button located at the top of the seat back. [FV31000(B )05/95] one third page art:0020227-D Seat back release 130 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV31101(B F )05/95] RWARNING A seatback which is folded forward even a small degree may not lock properly in the event of a sudden stop or collision. [FV43500(B )01/89] Rear Flip Fold Seat [FV43600(B )01/89] To fold the seat forward: [FV43700(B )01/89] 1. The seat back latch is at the lower rear right hand side of the seat. Lift the latch handle to unlock the seat back. [FV43800(B )03/90] 2. Fold the seat back over the seat cushion until it locks into place. [FV43900(B )03/90] 3. Unlock the seat from the floor striker by lifting the seat latch handle at the center rear edge of the seat. [FV44000(B )03/90] 4. Lift the seat and fold forward. [FV44100(B )12/89] To remove and reinstall the rear flip-fold seat: [FV44200(B )01/89] 1. Remove the torque rod by releasing it from the right hand floor bracket (by pushing forward and up). [FV44300(B )01/89] 2. Remove the pin spring retainers and the pins from both the floor brackets. [FV44400(B )01/89] 3. Remove the seat assembly from your Bronco. Reverse this procedure to install the rear flip-fold seat. [FV44500(B )05/90] NOTE: It is important that you do not damage the seat belt hardware while removing or installing the rear flip-fold seat. 131 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 [FV44600(B )01/89] half page art:0020238-A Assembly for installing and removing the rear seat *[FV45901(B F )05/93] *[FV46020(B F )05/93] Tilt Slide Seat *[FV46025(B F )05/94] *[FV46030(B F )05/93] To operate the tilt slide seat: 1. Lift the seatback release lever on the outboard side of the seat cushion to unlock the slide mechanism and the seatback. *[FV46035(B F )03/93] 2. Push the seat assembly forward to provide entry space to the rear seat compartment of the vehicle. With the seatback tilted forward, the tilt slide seat can be moved forward to provide additional entry space to access the rear seat compartment of the vehicle. *[FV46043(B F )08/94] RWARNING Do not place objects behind or under the front seat which can prevent the seat from returning to the locked position. 132 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV46045(B F )05/93] *[FV46051(B F )05/93] Relocking the seat after a tilt slide operation: *[FV46053(B F )10/94] NOTE: The seat can no longer be moved rearward when in its latched position. 3. Push the seat backrest to its upright latched position. Continue to push the seat rearward to return it to its latched position. (This can be done from inside the rear seat compartment or from outside the vehicle.) *[FV46055(B F )07/94] one third page art:0021018-B *[FV46065(B F )05/95] Prior to operating the vehicle, check to ensure that the seat assembly is locked by pushing or pulling the seat forward or rearward. If seat does not lock, repeat steps 2 and 3. *[FV46070(B F )07/94] one third page art:0021019-B 133 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV46075(B F )03/93] *[FV46080(B F )05/93] To operate the seat adjuster: 4. To adjust the seats forward or rearward, locate the release lever at the right lower front area of the seat cushion. Move the release lever to the right and hold until the desired seat position is obtained, then release the lever to relock the seat. *[FV46085(B F )07/94] one third page art:0021020-B *[FV47000(BEF )03/94] Using the Power Lumbar Support and Side Bolsters *[FV47400(BEF )12/91] If your vehicle is equipped with this option, you can inflate a lumbar support pad in the seat back. To inflate the lumbar pad, push the (+) side of the rocker switch. To deflate push the (-) side of the switch. *[FV47500(BEF )06/92] quarter page art:0020860-B Power lumbar switch 134 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV47600(BEF )04/95] *[FV47620(BEF )05/95] *[FV47625(BEF )05/95] Cleaning the Seats *[FV47630(BEF )04/95] Wipe the surface with a damp, soft cloth, then dry and buff with a dry, soft cloth. *[FV47640(BEF )04/95] *[FV47650(BEF )04/95] Fabric *[FV47660(BEF )04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hidden area of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture is adversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not use it. *[FV50000(BEF )01/95] *[FV50200(BEF )03/91] Mirrors *[FV50325(BEF )05/95] Leather and vinyl For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner or a mild soap. Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directions that come with the cleaner. With the door closed and the seat adjusted for comfort and proper vehicle control, move the mirrors for best view by tilting up or down, left or right. Do not adjust the mirrors while the vehicle is in motion. RWARNING Make sure you can see clearly through the rearview mirror at all times. Do not allow anything to block your vision. If you can’t see through the mirror, you could be involved in an accident and injure yourself or others. 135 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV50700(B F )01/95] % Automatic Dimming Inside Rearview Mirror (If equipped) *[FV50850(B F )03/93] half page art:0021008-A Automatic dimming inside rearview mirror *[FV50900(B F )03/93] This mirror is equipped with an electrochromic glare control feature that automatically darkens the mirror, reducing glare from the headlamps of vehicles behind you. A forward facing light sensor measures the ambient light just as your eyes do. When the rear facing light sensor in the glass senses glare, such as from following headlights, it energizes a chemical layer in the glass causing it to darken and absorb light. As the glare subsides, the mirror glass returns to its normal clear state. *[FV51050(B F )03/94] To turn the mirror on, push the On/Off switch, located on the bottom of the mirror, to latch it in the ON position. The button will be latched in the up position and at night a low intensity green light will be visible from the button when the mirror is turned on. To turn the mirror off, 136 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 push the On/Off switch again and the button will unlatch shutting off the light and the mirror will be off. *[FV51100(B F )03/93] Demonstration — The mirror’s operation may be demonstrated by simulating glare as follows: *[FV51200(B F )03/94] 1. Cover the forward facing sensor, located on the right side of the mirror back, with a dark (preferably black) cloth. Hold the dark cloth over the sensor until you notice the mirror glass start to darken to the non-glare state. If the surrounding lighting conditions are too dark it may be necessary to shine additional lighting, such as from a flashlight, on the rearward sensor located on the glass face. *[FV51400(B F )03/93] 2. Remove the cloth (and shut off the flashlight if applicable) and the glass will return to the clear reflective stage. *[FV51500(B F )01/95] One important safety feature is that the mirror automatically returns to the normal position whenever the vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) (when the mirror is in the ON position). This feature ensures a bright clear view in the mirror when backing up. *[FV52900(BEF )12/89] *[FV53000(BEF )10/89] Outside Mirrors (Manual Control) *[FV53100(BEF )03/95] On vehicles equipped with fold-away mirrors, the mirrors should be folded rearward into the body position before entering automatic car wash systems. Adjust outside mirrors with the door closed and the seat adjusted for comfort and proper vehicle control. Move the mirrors for best view by tilting up or down, left or right. 137 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV53300(B F )12/91] quarter page art:0020900-B Standard fold-away mirror [FV53800(B )05/90] quarter page art:0020324-B Low-mount swingaway mirror *[FV54000(B )12/91] The right-hand side view mirror is convex. This mirror has a curved surface and will show a wider view of the lane next to and behind your vehicle. *[FV54400(BEF )05/95] RWARNING The side view mirror on the right makes objects appear smaller and farther away than they actually are. 138 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV54500(BEF )08/91] Dual Electric Remote Control Mirrors (If equipped) *[FV54600(BEF )08/91] *[FV54800(BEF )06/94] To adjust the remote controlled side mirrors: 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s door panel. *[FV55000(BEF )06/94] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the selector switch to R or L. *[FV55200(BEF )06/94] 3. Move the control knob in the direction you want to move the mirror. *[FV55400(BEF )06/94] 4. Return the selector switch to the middle position to keep the mirror in place. *[FV55700(B F )12/91] quarter page art:0020886-A Power mirror control *[FV55900(BEF )12/91] Do not clean the plastic housing of any electric mirror with gasoline or other petroleum-based cleaning products. 139 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV59400(BEF )01/95] *[FV59500(BEF )12/91] Console Your vehicle may have a full console. The full console has the features shown in the illustration below. *[FV60100(B F )12/91] half page art:0020683-C The features on the console 140 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV60200(B F )12/91] three fourths page art:0020909-A Seat mounted console 141 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 [FV60350(B )03/93] Overhead Console (Eddie Bauer only) [FV60450(B )05/95] Your Eddie Bauer Bronco comes with an overhead console located between the sun visors. The console includes: *[FV60500(B )03/93] *[FV60600(B )03/93] *[FV60700(B )03/93] *[FV60800(B )03/93] *[FV60900(B )05/95] ❑ Compass/temperature display ❑ Map lamps ❑ Storage compartment Compass/Temperature display This display provides the outside temperature and the compass direction of the vehicle. *[FV60920(B )03/93] The MODE button is used to select one of the following features: *[FV60940(B )03/93] *[FV60960(B )03/93] *[FV60980(B )03/93] ❑ Display Off ❑ Temp in ˚F and Compass ❑ Temp in ˚C and Compass [FV61001(B )05/95] quarter page art:0020980-B Compass/temperature display [FV61100(B )03/93] Outside temperature display *[FV61150(B )05/95] If the outside temperature is below 39˚F (4˚C), the word “ICE” will flash in the display alternately with the outside temperature for about one minute. 142 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 [FV61400(B )05/95] Electronic Compass [FV61500(B )03/93] Factors affecting compass accuracy *[FV61600(B )01/95] The compass reading can be affected when you drive near a number of things — such as large buildings, bridges, power lines, and powerful antennas. *[FV61700(B )05/95] Your compass can also be affected by magnetic or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle. If the compass is giving inaccurate readings, perform the following compass adjustments. [FV61800(B )03/93] Compass adjustments *[FV61900(B )05/95] There are two possible adjustments to the compass: Zone and Calibration. [FV62050(B )05/95] Zone adjustment *[FV62100(B )03/93] 1. Determine which zone of the country you are in by referring to the following zone map. 143 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 [FV62200(B )03/93] half page art:0080142-C Zone map *[FV62300(B )03/93] 2. Press and hold the “MODE” button until the “VAR” indicator appears in the display (approximately 4 seconds). *[FV62400(B )03/93] 3. Release the “MODE” button. The display will now show the current zone number that is stored in the compass. *[FV62500(B )03/93] 4. Press the “MODE” button repeatedly (or press and hold in) until the desired zone number appears in the display (once it reaches 15, the next press of the button will set it to 1). *[FV62600(B )03/93] 5. Release the “MODE” button when the desired zone number is displayed. *[FV62700(B )05/95] After approximately three seconds the display will flash all segments and then return to normal operation. Zone is now updated. 144 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 [FV62850(B )05/95] Calibration adjustment *[FV62900(B )03/93] 1. Find an open area that is free from steel structures and high voltage lines. An open parking lot is a good example. *[FV63000(B )03/93] 2. Press and hold the “MODE” button until the “CAL” indicator appears in the display (approximately 8 seconds). *[FV63050(B )05/95] NOTE: You cannot perform calibration unless the display reads “CAL.” *[FV63100(B )03/93] *[FV63300(B )03/93] 3. Release the “MODE” button. 4. Once the “CAL” indicator has appeared, drive the vehicle slowly (less than 3 mph / 5 km/h) in 360˚ circles until the “CAL” indicator turns off. This will happen within 2 to 3 complete circles. *[FV63800(B )03/93] *[FV63900(B )03/93] Map lamps The map lamps are located in the overhead console. The driver and passenger side each has its own switch. [FV64050(B )05/94] one third page art:0021077-B Map lamps — Eddie Bauer only 145 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV64100(B )03/93] *[FV64200(B )03/93] Storage Compartment *[FV64300(B )03/93] The compartment can be used to store a variety of items such as: tissues, parking pass, cigarettes or sunglasses. *[FV64400(B )03/93] *[FV64500(B )03/93] Use as Garage Door Opener *[FV64600(B )03/93] *[FV64700(B )03/93] Removal of storage clip The storage compartment can be accessed by pushing the “OPEN” button. The door will open approximately one inch then it can be manually moved to the full open position. The door can be converted from “Utility” storage to a housing and means of actuating a variety of “aftermarket” garage door opener transmitters. In order to convert the door, simply remove the utility storage clip from the back side of the door as shown in the following illustration. [FV64850(B )05/93] one third page art:0021079-A 146 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV64900(B )03/93] *[FV65000(B )03/93] Installing “aftermarket” transmitter *[FV65100(B )03/93] Place the transmitter into the console housing, button down, as shown. Place the height adapters provided into the back side of the “GARAGE” button as needed. Some larger transmitters will not need the adapters, and some smaller ones may need two adapters. *[FV65200(B )03/93] The transmitter can now be activated without opening the door. Simply depress the “GARAGE” button. Place the piece of Velcro hook onto your aftermarket transmitter, opposite side as that of the actuator button. [FV65350(B )05/93] one third page art:0021080-A 147 File:ltfvb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:28:41 1995 *[FV69900(BEF )03/95] *[FV70000(B F )05/94] *[FV70200(BEF )06/92] Power Point Electrical Outlet The power point outlet is located on the instrument panel to the right of the shift lever. This outlet should be used in place of the cigarette lighter for optional electrical accessories. NOTE: Do not use the cigarette lighter in place of the power point. *[FV70300(B F )06/92] quarter page art:0020929-A Power point electrical outlet *[FV70500(B F )07/92] To access the outlet, lift up the hinged cover. 148 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS01100(BEF )04/95] full page art:0060648-B Electronic Sound Systems Compact Disc Radio 149 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS01200(BEF )04/95] *[AS01250(BEF )05/95] Compact Disc Radio The Compact Disc Radio combines the Electronic Stereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player. *[AS01300(BEF )04/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CD Player *[AS01400(BEF )04/95] Most of the features of this unit work for both radio and CD operation. Also, some of the knobs and buttons control several different functions, so be sure to read all of the operating instructions carefully. *[AS01500(BEF )04/95] *[AS01600(BEF )04/95] How to turn the radio on and off *[AS01625(BEF )04/95] *[AS01650(BEF )05/95] How to adjust the volume *[AS01675(BEF )04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if the radio power is turned off (with the “POWER” button), the volume will remain in the position it was set at when radio power is switched back on. *[AS01700(BEF )04/95] *[AS01800(BEF )04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it again to turn it off. Press the (+/–) side of the “VOL” button to increase/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate in the display to show the relative volume level. Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band. When in the radio mode, pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons described under How to tune radio stations. 150 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS01900(BEF )05/95] *[AS02000(BEF )07/94] How to tune radio stations *[AS02100(BEF )04/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manually % There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You can manually locate the station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. These four methods are described below. tune *[AS02200(BEF )04/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time (FM changes in increments of 200kHz; AM changes in increments of 10kHz) by first pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows “TUNE”), then — within approximately five seconds —pressing and releasing either the top a or bottom b half of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the top or bottom half of the “SEEK” button. While you are manually tuning, the display will show a blinking “M”. *[AS02300(BEF )04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) 151 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS02400(BEF )04/95] *[AS02500(BEF )04/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function *[AS02600(BEF )04/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scan This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the top a half of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the bottom b half of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By pressing and holding the button, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. radio stations *[AS02700(BEF )04/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once enters the scan mode (display will indicate “SCN”). Pushing the top a half of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately five seconds. Pushing the bottom b half of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode down the frequency band, again stopping on each listenable station for approximately five seconds. *[AS02800(BEF )04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE” button again. *[AS03000(BEF )04/95] *[AS03100(BEF )04/95] ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons *[AS03200(BEF )04/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10 FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies. 1. 152 Select a band, then select a frequency. File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS03400(BEF )04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. *[AS03500(BEF )04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set. *[AS03510(BEF )04/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the clock and station memory preset buttons (if programmed in auto mode) will need to be reset. *[AS03520(BEF )04/95] *[AS03530(BEF )04/95] ❑ Using the Automatic Memory Load feature You can activate the Auto Memory Load feature by pressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET” button for approximately three seconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking out the first five strong stations for the respective band and storing them in memory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set of strong stations from the FM band.) *[AS03800(BEF )05/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strong stations into your memory buttons without losing your existing memory presets, which is especially handy while traveling. Your radio will automatically set your memory buttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have to continually manually tune to existing stations. *[AS03900(BEF )05/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio will set the first five strong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory buttons. The display will show “AUTO”, then run through the frequencies, stopping momentarily on the stations being set into the memory buttons. The radio is 153 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 now in the “AUTO” mode and this display will show “AUTO” each time a preset is activated. *[AS04000(BEF )05/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in the frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will store the last strong station detected on the band. *[AS04100(BEF )05/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio will begin playing the station stored on memory button 1. *[AS04200(BEF )04/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to the manually-set memory button stations (or those stations set using Auto Memory Load), simply push the “AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band, the radio will store the next set of five strong stations. *[AS04400(BEF )04/95] Using the “AUDIO” button to adjust the tone balance and speaker output *[AS04500(BEF )04/95] *[AS04600(BEF )04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response *[AS04700(BEF )04/95] *[AS04800(BEF )04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increase bass (more “lows”), and push the “-” side to decrease bass (less “lows”). Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increase treble (more “highs”), and push the “-” side to decrease treble (less “highs”). 154 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS05050(BEF )04/95] *[AS05100(BEF )04/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker balance *[AS05150(BEF )04/95] *[AS05200(BEF )04/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker fader *[AS05250(BEF )04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of bass and treble and positions of speaker balance and fader functions after adjustments are made, then revert to volume level set. *[AS05300(BEF )04/95] *[AS05350(BEF )04/95] Clock operation Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the left speakers. Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. When in the radio mode, push the “CLOCK” button to switch from radio frequency to clock. Only the clock numerals will be displayed in the clock mode — there is no A.M./P.M. indication. When in the clock mode, the time will be displayed until the button is pushed again. However, if you retune the radio while it is in the clock mode, the new radio frequency will be displayed for approximately ten seconds and then change back to clock. 155 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS05400(BEF )04/95] When in the CD mode, push the “CLOCK” button to change the display from elapsed time mode to track number mode to clock mode. If the CD track selection is changed when you are in the clock or elapsed time mode, the new track number will be displayed for approximately ten seconds and then revert back to the previous mode. *[AS05425(BEF )07/93] The clock can also be viewed with the ignition off. Push the “CLOCK” button and the time will be displayed momentarily. *[AS05450(BEF )04/95] To set the clock, simultaneously press the “CLOCK” button and either the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button to set hours, or the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to set minutes. *[AS06050(BEF )04/95] Using the Controls on Your New Compact Disc Player *[AS06150(BEF )04/95] Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capable of playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without an adapter! The Player operates when the power is on and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handle the disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read and follow all of the care and cleaning instructions under How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs. *[AS06200(BEF )04/95] NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc is ejected and “ERROR” begins scrolling in the display, remove the disc and reinsert it right side up (label side up). *[AS06250(BEF )04/95] The digital display on your CD player will either show the track (selection) number or the elapsed time. (The display mode can be selected by pressing the “CLOCK” button.) Indicators for play (a), stop (X) and compression on (“C”) are also in the display. (These features are described later.) 156 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS06300(BEF )04/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD player will override that of the radio. *[AS06350(BEF )04/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and fader controls on the radio are also used with the CD player. Refer to earlier operating instructions on these controls. *[AS06400(BEF )04/95] *[AS06450(BEF )04/95] How to insert a disc and begin play *[AS06500(BEF )04/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc player automatically returns to the beginning of the disc and resumes playing. NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc opening is secured to prevent the accidental insertion of a second disc. NOTE: The CD player has heat protection circuitry to protect the laser diode. If the temperature of the player reaches 167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuit will shut off the player and “TOO HOT” will scroll in the display for approximately five seconds (radio will resume playing). When the temperature returns to normal operating range, the CD player will again be operational. *[AS06550(BEF )04/95] *[AS06600(BEF )04/95] *[AS06650(BEF )04/95] *[AS06700(BEF )04/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the disc opening. When inserted, the disc automatically loads into the unit and play starts at the beginning of the first track (selection). How to stop and restart the CD player When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically enters the play mode and the play indicator a illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the “PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button. The stop indicator X in the display illuminates and operation returns to the radio mode. To resume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP” button once again. 157 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS06750(BEF )04/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF during play and then is set to the ON or ACCESSORY position, the CD player will resume playing in the mode it was in when ignition was turned off. *[AS06760(BEF )04/95] *[AS06765(BEF )04/95] Using the “SEEK” feature *[AS06770(BEF )05/95] Press the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button once to repeat the current playing selection. Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to advance to the next selection. *[AS06775(BEF )05/95] Pressing and holding the bottom (b) or top (a) half of the “SEEK” button will scroll backward and forward respectively through the tracks. *[AS06800(BEF )05/95] How to fast forward or reverse your CD player *[AS06850(BEF )05/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward) or the “REV” button (to reverse). While either button is pressed, the disc goes forward or backward at two different speeds depending on how long the button is held down. (Pressing either button for more than approximately three seconds will speed up the process.) Release the button at the desired point (found by watching the elapsed playing time in the display or by listening to the sound during fast forward or reverse). When you have reached the beginning of track 1, the CD player will begin playing. *[AS06900(BEF )04/95] When you have reached the end of the disc by keeping the fast forward button pressed, the display will show “END” and the player will go into pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP” button to begin playing the first track of the disc, press the “REV” button to back up from The “SEEK” feature allows you to quickly find a particular selection on the disc. 158 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 the end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” function to locate a desired track. *[AS07000(BEF )04/95] *[AS07050(BEF )04/95] Using the “SCAN” function *[AS07100(BEF )04/95] *[AS07150(BEF )04/95] *[AS07200(BEF )04/95] Special features of your CD player *[AS07250(BEF )04/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the scan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the top (a) or bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button to scan forward or reverse, respectively. The CD player will begin scanning the disc, stopping on each listenable track for approximately eight seconds. This continues until you press the “SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. While in the scan mode, the display shows the current sampled track number. ❑ Compression The compression feature will bring soft and loud passages closer together for a more consistent listening level. To turn the compression on, press the “COMP” button. When on, the compression indicator (“C”) will appear in the display. Press the button again to turn off. *[AS07300(BEF )04/95] *[AS07350(BEF )04/95] ❑ Automatic Disc Storage *[AS07400(BEF )04/95] *[AS07500(BEF )04/95] How to eject the disc If the disc is ejected from the CD player but is not removed from the disc opening within approximately 10 seconds, the player will automatically reload the disc for storage, unless the disc is automatically ejected due to a “focus error” (disc inserted upside down). In this case, the disc will not be automatically reloaded. Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject the disc and resume radio operation of your audio system. 159 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS07600(BEF )04/95] NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radio power and/or ignition is on or off. % How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs *[AS08200(BEF )04/95] To ensure the continued performance of your Ford Compact Disc Player, carefully read the following precautions: *[AS08300(BEF )04/95] ❑ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never *[AS08400(BEF )04/95] ❑ Before playing, inspect the disc for any *[AS08500(BEF )04/95] ❑ Do not clean discs with solvents such as *[AS08600(BEF )04/95] ❑ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or *[AS08700(BEF )04/95] *[AS08800(BEF )04/95] ❑ After playing, store the disc in its case. ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try *[AS08900(BEF )04/95] ❑ Do not insert anything other than a disc into *[AS08100(BEF )04/95] touch the playing surface. contamination. If needed, clean the disc with an approved disc cleaner, such as the DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to the edges. Do not use a circular motion to clean. benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intended for analog records. heat sources such as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be a considerable rise in temperature or damage may result. to insert another disc. Doing so may damage the disc player. the disc player. 160 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS09000(BEF )04/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard as the laser beam used in this compact disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. *[AS09100(BEF )04/95] Common Operating Conditions of Your CD Player *[AS09200(BEF )04/95] The following information is designed to help you recognize typical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted as mechanical malfunctions of the disc player. *[AS09300(BEF )04/95] *[AS09400(BEF )04/95] ❑ A disc is already loaded. ❑ The disc is inserted with the label surface *[AS09500(BEF )04/95] *[AS09600(BEF )04/95] ❑ The disc is dusty or defective. ❑ The player’s internal temperature is above *[AS09700(BEF )04/95] ❑ Different manufacturers of compact discs may downward. 140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool off before operating. produce discs with different dimensions or tolerances, some of which may not be within industry standards or in accordance with the CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dust and scratches could be defective and may not play on your Ford Compact Disc Player. 161 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS09800(BEF )04/95] If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed: *[AS09850(BEF )04/95] *[AS09900(BEF )04/95] *[AS10000(BEF )05/95] ❑ The radio is not on. ❑ The unit is in the stop mode. ❑ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses *[AS10100(BEF )04/95] *[AS10200(BEF )04/95] If the sound skips: within the unit. If this occurs, remove the CD magazine and wait approximately an hour until the moisture evaporates. ❑ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc player or scratch the discs. 162 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS21300(BEF )05/95] *[AS21400(BEF )02/95] *[AS21415(BEF )04/95] full page art:0060586-C Electronic Stereo and Stereo Cassette Radios Using the Controls on Your New Radio Electronic Stereo Radio 163 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS21420(BEF )04/95] full page art:0060587-C Electronic Stereo Radio with Cassette 164 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS22305(BEF )05/95] *[AS22310(BEF )05/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio) There are three ways for you to tune in to a particular station. You can manually locate the station by using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. % How to tune radio stations (Stereo Cassette Radio) *[AS22350(BEF )02/95] There are four ways for you to tune in to a particular station. You can manually locate the station by using Automatic Music Search (“AMS”), “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. *[AS22450(BEF )05/95] *[AS22460(BEF )05/95] ❑ Using the “TUNE” function *[AS22320(BEF )05/95] *[AS22470(BEF )04/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time by pressing and releasing either the right (+) or left (-) side of the “TUNE” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “TUNE” button. Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) 165 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS22550(BEF )05/95] ❑ Using the “AMS” function to manually tune your radio (Stereo Cassette Radio) You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time by first pressing the “AMS” button (display shows “TUNE”) then within approximately five seconds pressing and releasing either the right (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “SEEK” button. *[AS22650(BEF )02/95] *[AS22800(BEF )04/95] *[AS22900(BEF )04/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function *[AS23125(BEF )02/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function (Stereo Cassette *[AS23150(BEF )07/94] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The radio will begin scanning up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately a five-second sampling. This continues until you press the “SCAN” button a second time. The display flashes “AM” or “FM.” *[AS23200(BEF )04/95] *[AS23250(BEF )05/95] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b) side of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By holding the button down, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. Radio) ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10 preset FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). 166 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS23400(BEF )02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies: *[AS23500(BEF )04/95] *[AS23700(BEF )04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. *[AS23800(BEF )04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set. *[AS23900(BEF )04/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the clock and station memory preset buttons (if programmed in auto mode) will need to be reset. *[AS24000(BEF )02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of your radio *[AS24150(BEF )05/95] *[AS24300(BEF )04/95] *[AS24350(BEF )05/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase bass (more “lows”), and push the left (-) side to decrease bass (less “lows”). ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase the treble (more “highs”), and push the left (-) side to decrease treble (less “highs”). 167 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS24500(BEF )08/89] *[AS24600(BEF )04/95] *[AS24650(BEF )05/95] Speaker features and operation *[AS24800(BEF )04/95] *[AS24850(BEF )05/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker fader *[AS24950(BEF )05/94] NOTE: Illuminated bars show relative levels of bass and treble and positions of speaker balance and fader functions after adjustments are made, then revert to volume level set. *[AS25000(BEF )02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player *[AS25500(BEF )02/95] *[AS25600(BEF )02/95] How to insert a tape *[AS25650(BEF )04/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the ignition on whether or not the radio power is on. ❑ Adjusting speaker balance Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the left (-) side to shift the sound to the left speakers. Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and push the left (-) side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the right) firmly into the tape door opening, making sure the cassette is completely in and “seated.” 168 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS25700(BEF )02/95] *[AS26265(BEF )02/95] *[AS26270(BEF )03/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape *[AS26900(BEF )02/95] ❑ How to change the side of the tape being *[AS27000(BEF )03/95] ❑ Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”) Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS” will appear in the display). Then, push the left (h) button to rewind to the beginning of the current selection or press the right (g) button to fast forward to the beginning of the next selection. played The alternate track (other side) of the tape can be selected at any time by pushing both fast-wind buttons (h and g) at the same time. *[AS27100(BEF )02/95] *[AS27250(BEF )02/95] How to eject the tape *[AS27300(BEF )02/95] *[AS27500(BEF )05/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature *[AS27550(BEF )02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. *[AS27555(B )03/95] *[AS27560(BEF )07/90] *[AS27565(BEF )07/93] Clock Operation To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJECT” button. The radio will resume playing. Push the k button to activate. Push again to deactivate. How to view the clock mode Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate the frequency and time in the display. In the clock mode, pressing any radio function will automatically display the radio frequency for approximatedly ten seconds before changing back to the clock mode. 169 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS27570(BEF )07/90] *[AS27575(BEF )04/92] *[AS27585(BEF )03/95] How to set the clock *[AS27595(BEF )07/90] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PM indications. *[AS27600(BEF )02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes *[AS27700(BEF )02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions: *[AS27750(BEF )02/95] ❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to *[AS27800(BEF )02/95] ❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or *[AS27900(BEF )02/95] ❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct *[AS28001(BEF )02/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it *[AS28101(BEF )02/95] ❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button, press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advance the hours and right (a) to advance the minutes. clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the best playback sound and proper tape operation. less should be used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism. sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate temperature before playing. before playing by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and turning the hub until the tape is tight. lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting a cassette. 170 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS28200(BEF )03/95] ❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape *[AS35200(BEF )02/95] *[AS35300(BEF )02/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions *[AS35400(BEF )04/95] *[AS35500(BEF )02/95] 1. *[AS35600(BEF )04/95] *[AS35700(BEF )02/95] 2. *[AS35900(BEF )01/95] If there is a building or large structure between the antenna and station, some of the signal “bends” around the building, but certain spots receive almost no signal. Moving out of the “shadow” of the structure will allow the station to return to normal. *[AS36000(BEF )01/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects or structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and distortion. Cancellation effects are most prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can become quite severe in hilly terrain and depressed roadways. % player when not in use. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp. Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completely clear and noise-free, such as the following: Distance/Strength The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance the signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FM signal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signal becomes weaker. Terrain The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area over which the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from being noise-free. 171 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS36100(BEF )01/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono blend circuit has been incorporated into this system. This feature automatically switches a weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal, which improves the quality of reception. *[AS36200(BEF )01/95] Several sources of static are normal conditions on AM frequencies. These can be caused by power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms. *[AS36300(BEF )01/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal Capture and Overload. This can occur when listening to a weak station and when passing another broadcast tower. The close station may capture the more distant station, although the displayed frequency does not change. While passing the tower, the station may switch back and forth a few times before returning to the original station. *[AS36400(BEF )01/95] When several broadcast towers are present (common in metropolitan areas) several stations may overload the receiver, resulting in considerable station changing, mixing and distortion. *[AS36500(BEF )01/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM and FM bands has been incorporated into this system to reduce strong signal capture and overload. 172 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 % *[AS36600(BEF )08/89] *[AS36700(BEF )05/95] All About Radio Frequencies The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) establish the frequencies AM and FM radio stations may use for their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are, AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz steps. *[AS36800(BEF )01/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given area. This radio will tune to each of these frequencies using MANUAL TUNE and no fine tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use other frequencies. *[AS36900(BEF )02/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a “rounded-off” frequency which is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. For example, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99” even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM broadcast frequency. 173 File:ltasb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:27:22 1995 *[AS37000(BEF )01/95] Important Warranty and Service Information *[AS37050(BEF )07/90] *[AS37100(BEF )03/95] Warranty *[AS37300(BEF )10/92] *[AS37400(BEF )01/95] Service Your sound system is warranted for three years or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty booklet for further information. Ask your dealer for a copy of this limited warranty. At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio systems with a comprehensive service and repair program. If anything should go wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealer for service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist you. 174 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 Driving Your Bronco *[DR00350(BEF )03/95] Procedures for driving your vehicle will vary depending on which type of transmission your vehicle has. *[DR00550(BEF )04/95] ❑ an Electronic 4-speed Automatic Transmission *[DR00575(BEF )03/93] ❑ an Electronic 4-speed Automatic Transmission *[DR00600(B F )03/95] *[DR00650(BEF )04/95] ❑ a manual transmission (E4OD) (4R7OW) Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Powertrain Control Module that limits engine and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode to promote durability. *[DR08650(BEF )03/93] Automatic Transmission Operation (E4OD and 4R70W) *[DR08710(BEF )03/94] The E4OD and 4R70W transmissions are electronically controlled four speed automatic transmissions with overdrive. Transmission operation is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). *[DR08720( ALL)08/94] The PCM will automatically adjust transmission operation to make up for varying conditions. Several sensors located on the engine and transmission such as Throttle Position, Engine Speed, Vehicle Speed and Transmission Temperature are used by the PCM to shift the transmission into a higher or lower gear when required for the best performance and fuel economy. For example, you may notice that the transmission will upshift to a higher gear more 175 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 quickly when the vehicle is first driven and has not reached normal operating temperature. *[DR08730( ALL)07/94] The PCM also controls the transmission’s Torque Converter Clutch to further raise vehicle performance and fuel economy. The Torque Converter Clutch will engage when the transmission operating temperature and other conditions determined by the PCM have been met. Engagement of the clutch may be noted as a decrease in engine speed after an upshift has completed or when the driver has depressed the throttle while driving at a steady road speed. [DR08740( ALL)04/95] To help in troubleshooting, the PCM continually performs self-tests on the electronic control system and if any faults are detected, will store them in memory. The Transmission Control Indicator Light (TCIL), which is located on the gearshift lever, may flash steadily if a malfunction has been detected. If the TCIL is flashing, contact your Ford dealer as soon as possible. If this condition persists, damage to the transmission could occur. [DR08745( ALL)04/95] NOTE: The word “OFF” located on the end of the gearshift lever is the transmission control indicator light (TCIL). *[DR08750( ALL)01/95] *[DR08800( ALL)03/94] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear Your vehicle’s gearshift is on the steering column. The Transmission Control Switch and indicator light are located on the end of the gearshift lever. You can put the gearshift in any of the several positions. 176 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR08915(BEF )06/94] one third page art:0021081-A The positions of the column-mounted gearshift *[DR08925( ALL)05/95] quarter page art:0020771-C Transmission Control Switch and indicator light (located on the gearshift lever) *[DR09000( ALL)01/93] RWARNING Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from position to position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. *[DR09100( ALL)01/95] Once you place the gearshift securely into position, gradually release the brake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary. 177 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR09110( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature. This feature prevents you from shifting from P (Park) unless you have the brake pedal depressed. (The ignition must be in the ON position.) If you cannot shift from P (Park) with the brake pedal depressed: *[DR09120( ALL)01/95] *[DR09130( ALL)01/95] *[DR09140( ALL)01/95] 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Remove the key. 3. Insert the key and rotate one position clockwise (ignition in the OFF position). *[DR09150( ALL)01/95] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). (If the vehicle is shifted to P (Park), you must repeat the previous steps.) *[DR09160( ALL)01/95] *[DR09165( ALL)05/95] 5. Start the vehicle. If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Bronco in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses. *[DR09170( ALL)05/95] RWARNING DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING. *[DR09200( ALL)01/95] *[DR09300( ALL)02/95] % R (Reverse) With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle will move backward. You should always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse). 178 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR09400( ALL)01/95] % [DR09500( ALL)04/95] * *[DR09600( ALL)04/95] Driving *[DR09700( ALL)03/94] *[DR09800( ALL)05/95] When to use Drive % When to use j (Overdrive) This is the normal driving position. As the vehicle picks up speed, automatic upshifts to second, third and fourth gears will occur when j Overdrive is chosen on the selector and the transmission control switch has not been pressed. The transmission will shift into the correct gear when the right speed is achieved, for the accelerator pedal position you have chosen. You will note that there isn’t a drive position on your gearshift indicator. However, you will find a Transmission Control Switch and an indicator light labeled “Overdrive” located on the end of the gearshift lever. Press this switch and the word “OFF” will illuminate on the shift lever knob. With the word “OFF” illuminated, the transmission will operate in gears one through three. Operating in the Overdrive “OFF” mode gives more engine braking than Overdrive and is useful for descending hills or when towing. [DR09850( ALL)04/95] quarter page art:0020771-C Transmission Control Switch and indicator light (located on the gearshift lever) 179 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR09900( ALL)05/95] To return the transmission to the normal j Overdrive operation, press the transmission control switch again. The Transmission Control Indicator Light will not be illuminated when Overdrive operation resumes. This switch may be used to select O/D ON or O/D OFF any time the vehicle is being driven. *[DR09950( ALL)05/94] When starting your vehicle, the overdrive system will automatically be in the normal overdrive mode. *[DR10000( ALL)03/94] If the Transmission Control Indicator Light is flashing on and off steadily, a transmission system malfunction was detected. The transmission will operate in a failure management mode and may have harsh engagements, firm shift feel, or abnormal shift schedule. If this condition persists, damage to the transmission could occur. Contact your dealer as soon as possible. *[DR10100( ALL)01/95] *[DR10200( ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second) *[DR10300( ALL)01/95] *[DR10400( ALL)04/95] When to use 1 (Low) Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades. This position provides 2 (Second) gear operation only. Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum engine braking on steep downgrades. Upshifts from 1 (Low) can be made by manually shifting to 2 (Second) or j (Overdrive). Selection of 1 (Low) gear provides only low gear operation from start-up. Selection of 1 (Low) while at higher speeds provides a shift to second gear, and a shift to first gear will occur after the vehicle decelerates to the proper speed. 180 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR10500( ALL)01/95] *[DR10600( ALL)03/94] P (Park) *[DR10650( ALL)03/94] The gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) if you cannot rotate it in a clockwise direction without lifting it toward you. *[DR10700( ALL)05/95] Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. To securely latch the gearshift in the P (Park) position, pull it toward you, push it completely counterclockwise against the stop, and then push it toward the instrument panel. RWARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). [DR10725(B F )05/95] *[DR10750(B F )05/95] When the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. RWARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. *[DR10800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running. 181 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR11100( ALL)06/94] *[DR11200( ALL)04/95] Forced Downshifts *[DR11235( ALL)03/94] *[DR11275( ALL)03/94] Power Braking *[DR11285( ALL)03/94] NOTE: Continued operation in the stall condition can result in transmission overheat, malfunction or fluid expulsion. *[DR11300(B F )03/95] Driving with a Manual Transmission *[DR11400(B F )03/95] *[DR11500(B F )01/95] Using the Clutch *[DR11600(B F )03/91] To move the vehicle, release the clutch slowly and at the same time press down slowly on the accelerator so that the vehicle accelerates. *[DR11700(B F )03/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch life. % To gain extra acceleration in j Overdrive or Drive (O/D OFF), push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will automatically downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first. Increasing the engine speed above idle without vehicle movement (such as holding the brake) in a forward or reverse gear causes transmission stall. Make sure the gearshift lever is in the N (Neutral) position and your right foot is holding down the brake pedal. Then press the clutch pedal to the floor with your left foot. Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock switch. The starter will not crank until the clutch pedal is fully depressed. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a few seconds. Move the gearshift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse). 182 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR11750(B F )03/95] Driving with your foot resting on the clutch may cause the vehicle to jerk sharply when pressing or removing your other foot from the accelerator. *[DR11800(B F )03/95] *[DR11900(B F )02/95] Shifting the Gears % The gearshift for a manual transmission is mounted on the floor. The gearshift pattern consists of seven positions: Neutral, five forward gears, and Reverse. *[DR12000(B F )03/93] quarter page art:0020134-A 5-Speed Overdrive manual transmission shift pattern *[DR12300(B F )03/91] *[DR12400(B F )03/95] *[DR12501(B F )03/91] Backing up 1. Push the clutch pedal in all the way to the floor and hold it. If you do not hold the clutch pedal in all the way, you may hear a grinding noise when you shift. *[DR12551(B F )03/93] 2. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop. Failure to do so may cause synchronizer teeth damage, reducing the useful life of your transmission. *[DR12600(B F )08/94] 3. Put the gearshift in Neutral and wait at least 3 seconds before shifting into R (Reverse) to prevent a grinding noise. Do not release the clutch. *[DR12700(B F )08/94] 4. Push the gearshift all the way to the right and pull it back into Reverse. To shift into R (Reverse): 183 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR12800(B F )01/95] With the 5-speed transmission you can engage R (Reverse) only by moving the gearshift from the left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) gears before you shift into R (Reverse). This is a special lockout feature that protects you from accidentally shifting into R when you downshift from 5 (Fifth) gear. *[DR12950(B F )02/92] 5. *[DR13000(B F )03/94] If R (Reverse) is not engaged, continue to push the clutch pedal in while you put the gearshift back into Neutral. Then, release the clutch pedal for a moment and repeat steps 2 through 5. *[DR13100(B F )03/91] *[DR13200(B F )03/91] Upshifting/downshifting Once R (Reverse) is engaged, slowly release the clutch pedal from the floor. Upshift and Downshift at the speeds that are specified in the charts available for your engine and transmission. 184 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR13250(B F )03/91] Recommended Shift Speeds [DR13550(B )06/93] 5.0L EFI Engine with 5-Speed Manual Overdrive Transmission [DR13700(B )05/95] twenty-eight pica chart:0020989-B *[DR15100(B F )03/95] When you slow down or climb a steep hill, always downshift before the engine starts to lose power. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives your vehicle better acceleration to increase speed again. 185 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR15200(B F )03/95] When you drive down steep hills, downshifting helps you keep a safe speed and helps prevent unnecessary wear on the brakes. *[DR15300(B F )03/95] When you come to a stop, do not downshift through each gear. Disengage the clutch and use the brake as necessary. Downshifting through the gears decreases your vehicle’s fuel economy. *[DR15400(B F )05/95] RWARNING Continued use of a damaged or worn clutch, prolonged clutch slippage or downshifting at excessive speeds can result in a failure of the engine, transmission or clutch components. *[DR15500(B F )03/91] *[DR15600(B F )03/91] Transmission Function *[DR15625(B F )04/94] NOTE: Shifting during extremely low rpm’s can result in a momentary audible rattle which disappears as vehicle rpm’s are increased. Shifting at higher speeds will eliminate this sound. *[DR15700(B F )03/95] *[DR15800(B F )01/95] Parking Upshift at the speeds specified in the chart available for your engine and transmission. All forward gears are synchronized allowing you to shift into them with your vehicle in motion. The clutch pedal should be fully depressed when shifting. To park your vehicle, apply the service brake pedal, and shift into N (Neutral) while still maintaining pressure on the service brake. Set the parking brake fully. Shift into first and turn off the ignition. 186 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR15900(B F )05/95] RWARNING Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. [DR15903(B F )05/95] *[DR15906(B F )05/95] When the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. RWARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. *[DR15915( ALL)01/95] % [DR15945( ALL)01/95] * Steering Your Vehicle Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to help steer your vehicle. % If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort. *[DR15960( ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left for more than five seconds if the engine is running. This can damage the power steering pump. *[DR15950( ALL)04/95] 187 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR15985( ALL)05/90] NOTE: After any severe impact such as striking large potholes, sliding into curbs on icy roads, or a collision involving the front end, observe the steering wheel alignment. If the spokes of the steering wheel seem to be in a different position while going straight down the road, have the front suspension and steering checked for possible damage. *[DR16101(B F )03/95] Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) System (If equipped) *[DR16130(B F )08/94] When you select the 4WD mode, your light truck uses all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction, enabling you to drive your 4x4 over terrain and road conditions two-wheel drive vehicles cannot. *[DR16160(B F )10/94] Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case that allows you to select four-wheel drive when necessary. Methods for engaging and disengaging 4WD and low range will depend on which system your vehicle has. 188 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR16190(B F )01/95] *[DR16220(B F )06/94] 4x4 Systems — Lever Operated [DR16225(B F )05/95] When the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. *[DR16230(B F )05/95] The lever operated transfer case can be placed into four positions. The 2H position is the two-wheel drive position in which power is delivered only to the rear axle. The 4H position provides four-wheel drive with power delivered to the front and rear axles for increased traction. The 4L position provides four-wheel drive with power delivered to the front and rear axles when the above average power is required at reduced speeds. In the N (neutral) position, there is no power delivered to either axle. RWARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. 189 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR16250(B F )12/91] two third page art:0020792-C Transfer case selections *[DR16310(B F )01/95] Four-wheel drive operation (4H or 4L) on dry pavement is not recommended. Operating the vehicle in four-wheel drive on dry pavement will increase tire wear, decrease fuel economy, and make four-wheel drive disengagement difficult for the transfer case. 190 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR16370(B F )06/94] *[DR16401(B F )06/94] 4x4 system indicator lights *[DR16430(B F )06/94] ❑ 2H position — Neither the 4X4 or the LOW *[DR16460(B F )06/94] *[DR16490(B F )06/94] ❑ 4H position — Only the 4x4 light is lit. ❑ N position — Neither the 4x4 or LOW *[DR16520(B F )06/94] ❑ 4L position — Both the 4x4 and the LOW *[DR16550(B F )03/91] Lever Operated System With Automatic Locking Hubs *[DR16580(B F )06/94] *[DR16610(B F )02/92] To shift from 2H to 4H: *[DR16620(B F )02/92] ❑ The automatic locking hubs may disengage in A 4x4 light and a LOW RANGE light are located at the lower right of the instrument cluster. RANGE lights are lit. RANGE lights are lit. RANGE lights are lit. Stop the vehicle and move the transfer case shift lever straight back to the 4H position, the automatic locking hubs will engage when the vehicle is driven. When the automatic locking hubs are engaged, shifts between 2H and 4H may take place at any speed. 2H if the vehicle’s direction is momentarily reversed, or the vehicle is allowed to roll slightly in the opposite direction. If a grinding noise occurs when shifting from 2H to 4H while the vehicle is moving, one or both of the automatic locking hubs have been disengaged and the transfer case shift lever should be switched back to the 2H position. To shift back into 4H, stop the vehicle and move the transfer case shift lever straight back to the 4H position. 191 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR16630(B F )05/91] ❑ When the vehicle is stopped while in 4H and *[DR16640(B F )06/94] *[DR16670(B F )03/93] To shift from 4H to 2H: *[DR16701(B F )06/94] *[DR16730(B F )03/93] For example: the vehicle’s direction is reversed from the previous direction, the automatic locking hubs momentarily disengage and then re-engage. The automatic locking hubs may click as they automatically engage in the new direction. Move the transfer case shift lever straight forward to the 2H position. This can be done at any speed. To disengage the automatic locking hubs, operate the vehicle in 2H in the opposite direction for approximately 10 feet (3 meters). If you were driving the vehicle forward in 4H, the automatic locking hubs will disengage the next time the vehicle is driven in reverse in 2H for approximately 10 feet (3 meters). *[DR16760(B F )03/93] If you were driving the vehicle in reverse in 4H, the automatic locking hubs will disengage the next time the vehicle is driven forward in 2H for approximately 10 feet (3 meters). *[DR16790(B F )03/91] — Operating in 2H with the hubs locked increases fuel consumption, noise, vibration, and wear. For prolonged 2H operation on dry pavement, disengage the automatic locking hubs. 192 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR16820(B F )06/94] *[DR16851(B F )05/91] To shift between 4H and 4L: *[DR16880(B F )03/91] To shift into and out of N (neutral) [DR16940(B )03/91] To shift into N (neutral), stop the vehicle and engage the parking brake. Place the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch. From either the 4H or 4L position, push the transfer case shift knob down (toward the ground) and move the transfer case shift lever to the N (neutral) position. The N (neutral) position should only be used for vehicle towing. *[DR16955(B F )12/91] NOTE: Dash mounted four wheel drive indicator lights are off when your vehicle is in neutral. *[DR17001(B F )05/91] To shift from N (Neutral) to either 4H or 4L, stop the vehicle and engage the parking brake. Place the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch on manual transmission vehicles. Push the transfer case knob down (toward the ground) and at the same time move the transfer case shift lever to the desired Stop the vehicle and place the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch on manual transmission vehicles. Push the transfer case shift knob down (toward the ground) and at the same time pull or push the lever straight forward or rearward (depending on the desired position, 4H or 4L) in order to shift the transfer case. This shift should be in one continuous motion without pausing in the N (neutral) position. Pausing in the neutral position can result in gear clash and difficult shifting. If, while shifting between 4H and 4L, the transfer case gets stuck in the N (neutral) position or is difficult to shift into either 4H or 4L, it may be necessary to let the vehicle roll slightly and/or turn off the engine (particularly on vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions). 193 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 position. If it is difficult to shift into either 4H or 4L, it may be necessary to let the vehicle roll slightly and/or turn off the engine (particularly on vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions). *[DR17030(B F )06/94] Lever Operated System With Manual Locking Hubs *[DR17060(B F )06/94] *[DR17090(B F )06/94] To shift from 2H to 4H: Stop the vehicle and engage the manual locking hubs by turning both hub lock selector knobs clockwise to the LOCK position. Move the transfer case shift lever straight back to the 4H position. After both hubs have been turned to the LOCK position, shifts between 2H and 4H (or 4H to 2H) may take place at any speed. *[DR17120(B F )03/91] one third page art:0020146-C Locking hub positions *[DR17150(B F )06/94] ❑ Do not drive the vehicle in 4H or 4L with the *[DR17180(B F )06/94] ❑ Do not drive the vehicle with the left and *[DR17210(B F )06/94] *[DR17240(B F )06/94] To shift from 4H to 2H: manual locking hubs in the FREE position. right manual locking hubs set to different positions. Move the transfer case shift lever forward to the 2H position. This can be done at any speed. 194 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 However, the front driveline will remain engaged to the front wheels until the manual locking hubs are disengaged. To disengage the manual locking hubs, stop the vehicle and rotate both hub lock selector knobs counter-clockwise to the FREE position. *[DR17270(B F )06/94] Operating in 2H with the hubs in the LOCK position increases fuel consumption, noise, vibration, and wear. For prolonged 2H operation on dry pavement, set the manual locking hubs to the FREE position. *[DR17301(B F )06/94] *[DR17330(B F )05/91] To shift between 4H and 4L: *[DR17390(B F )06/94] To shift to N (neutral) from either 4H or 4L [DR17480(B )05/91] To shift into N (neutral), stop the vehicle and engage the parking brake. Place the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch on manual transmission vehicles. From either the 4H or 4L position, push the transfer case shift knob down (toward the ground) and at the same time move the transfer case shift Stop the vehicle and place the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch on manual transmission vehicles. Push the transfer case shift knob down (toward the ground) and at the same time pull or push the lever straight forward or rearward (depending on the desired position 4H or 4L) in order to shift the transfer case. This shift should be with one continuous motion without pausing in the N (neutral) position. Pausing in the neutral position can result in gear clash and difficult shifting. If, while shifting between 4H and 4L, the transfer case gets stuck in the N (neutral) position or is difficult to shift into either 4H or 4L, it may be necessary to let the vehicle roll slightly and/or turn off the engine (particularly on vehicles equipped with automatic transmission). 195 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 lever to the N (neutral) position. The N (neutral) position should only be used for vehicle towing. *[DR17490(B F )12/91] NOTE: Dash mounted four wheel drive indicator lights are off when your vehicle is in neutral. *[DR17540(B F )01/95] To shift from N (Neutral) to either 4H or 4L, stop the vehicle and engage the parking brake. Place the automatic transmission into N (Neutral) or depress the clutch on manual transmission vehicles. Push the transfer case shift lever to the desired position. If it is difficult to shift into either 4H or 4L, it may be necessary to let the vehicle roll slightly and/or turn off the engine (particularly on vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions). *[DR17570(B F )06/94] *[DR17601(B F )06/94] 4x4 SYSTEMS-TOUCH DRIVE *[DR17630(B F )06/94] Four wheel drive operation (4x4 or 4x4 LOW RANGE) on dry pavement is not recommended. Operating the vehicle in four-wheel drive on dry pavement will increase noise, vibration, tire wear, decrease fuel economy, and make four-wheel drive disengagement difficult for the transfer case. The Touch Drive 4x4 system functions in three modes. In Two Wheel Drive mode, power is delivered only to the rear axle at normal road speed. The 4H position provides four-wheel drive with power delivered to the front and rear axles for increased traction. The 4L position provides four-wheel drive with power delivered to the front and rear axles when the above average power is required at reduced speeds. 196 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR17660(B F )06/94] *[DR17690(B F )03/91] Touch Drive system indicator lights *[DR17750(B F )06/94] ❑ Two Wheel Drive mode — Neither the 4x4 *[DR17780(B F )06/94] *[DR17810(B F )06/94] ❑ 4x4 mode — Only the 4x4 light is lit. ❑ 4x4 LOW RANGE mode — Both the 4x4 and *[DR17840(B F )06/94] *[DR17871(B F )06/94] To shift from Two-Wheel Drive to 4x4: A 4x4 indicator light and a LOW RANGE indicator light are located at the lower right of the instrument cluster. In addition, two small amber lights are located near the Touch Drive system buttons. The amber light to the left of the 4x4 button will light up at the same time as the 4x4 instrument panel light. The amber light to the left of the LOW RANGE light will light up at the same time as the instrument panel LOW RANGE light. nor the LOW RANGE lights are lit. LOW RANGE lights are lit. To shift into 4x4, push the 4x4 button located on the instrument panel. This shift can be done at a stop or at speeds up to 55 miles per hour (88 km/h). When the vehicle is driven, the automatic locking hubs will engage. If the vehicle is stopped while in 4x4 and the vehicle direction is reversed from the previous direction, the automatic locking hubs will momentarily disengage and reengage. The automatic locking hubs may click as they automatically engage in the new direction. 197 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR17900(B F )05/91] one third page art:0020634-B Touch drive electric shift switch *[DR17945(B F )06/92] — At extremely low temperatures, it may be necessary to slow down or even stop to shift from two wheel drive to 4x4. *[DR17960(B F )06/94] — The initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not a cause for concern. *[DR17990(B F )12/91] — Because of possible damage to powertrain components, never shift from Two-Wheel Drive to 4x4 with the rear wheels slipping. *[DR18020(B F )06/94] *[DR18050(B F )06/94] To shift from 4x4 to Two-Wheel Drive: Push the 4x4 button; the 4x4 lamp on the instrument cluster will go out indicating the vehicle is in Two-Wheel Drive. This can be done at any speed. To disengage the automatic locking hubs, operate the vehicle in Two-Wheel Drive in the opposite direction for approximately 10 feet (3 meters) in a straight line. 198 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR18080(B F )06/94] *[DR18110(B F )06/94] For example: If you were driving the vehicle forward in 4x4, the automatic locking hubs will disengage the next time the vehicle is driven in reverse in Two-Wheel Drive for approximately 10 feet (3 meters) in a straight line. *[DR18140(B F )06/94] If you were driving the vehicle in reverse in 4x4, the automatic locking hubs will disengage the next time the vehicle is driven forward in Two-Wheel Drive for approximately 10 feet (3 meters) in a straight line. *[DR18170(B F )01/95] Operating in two-wheel drive mode with the hubs locked increases fuel consumption, noise, vibration, and wear. For prolonged two-wheel drive operation on dry pavement, disengagement of the automatic locking hubs, which is not required for two-wheel drive operation, stops all movement of front-wheel drive components while operating in two-wheel drive. *[DR18230(B F )03/91] *[DR18290(B F )06/92] To shift from 4x4 to 4x4 LOW RANGE: *[DR18300(B F )08/94] NOTE: The vehicle must already be in 4x4 before pushing the Low Range Button. Stop the vehicle and place the automatic transmission in NEUTRAL or depress the clutch on vehicles with a manual transmission. Push the LOW RANGE button on the instrument panel to shift the transfer case from 4x4 to 4x4 LOW RANGE. Both the 4x4 and LOW RANGE lights are now lit. 199 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR18320(B F )03/91] *[DR18380(B F )06/94] To shift from 4x4 LOW RANGE to 4x4: *[DR19200(B F )01/89] Driving Off Road with 4-Wheel Drive *[DR19300(B F )11/89] Most vehicles with four-wheel drive are especially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud, or rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both off and on the road. The driving tips below will help you learn to use four-wheel drive. *[DR19400(B F )10/94] ❑ Do not use 4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced *[DR19600(B F )11/89] ❑ Special maintenance procedures are necessary *[DR19700(B F )08/94] ❑ Manual locking hubs must be in LOCK *[DR19800(B F )11/89] When using four-wheel drive, maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel rim from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. *[DR19900(B F )05/90] Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. Know the terrain or examine maps of the area in question before driving. Map out your route beforehand. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four Stop the vehicle and place the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch on vehicles with a manual transmission. Push the LOW RANGE button on the instrument panel to shift the transfer case from 4x4 LOW RANGE to 4x4. roads. after operating with drive components in water. position before shifting into four-wheel drive. 200 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 tires on the ground, and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. *[DR19925(B F )11/89] Transmission upshift in 4x4 with transfer case in 4L may be quite firm due to large total gear reduction. This condition is normal. *[DR20000(B F )11/89] *[DR20100(B F )11/89] Sand *[DR20200(B F )11/89] *[DR20300(B F )12/89] Mud and Water *[DR20400(B F )11/89] Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly, while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. *[DR20500(B F )11/89] After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance which could damage drive components. *[DR20525(B F )07/94] NOTE: If the transmission and transfer case is submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels of the vehicle on the most solid area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. 201 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR20650(B )11/89] Additional Special Driving Instructions for Utility Vehicles *[DR20701(B F )11/89] *[DR20800(B F )08/94] Driving on Hill or Slope Terrain *[DR20900(B F )11/89] When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear, rather than finding it necessary to downshift from a higher gear after the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. *[DR21000(B F )11/89] When descending a steep hill avoid sudden braking. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help slow the vehicle and still maintain steering control. *[DR21101(B F )11/89] *[DR21200(B F )10/90] Driving on Snow or Ice *[DR21300(B F )11/89] Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow or ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. [DR21312(B F )05/95] All utility-type and Four-Wheel Drive vehicles have special design and equipment features to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them higher centers of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. When driving on a hill, it may be necessary to travel diagonally up or down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes, you could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up, straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the other side of a hill before driving over the crest. A four-wheel drive vehicle has advantages over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. If so equipped, keep the vehicle in four-wheel drive if icy or slippery conditions exist. 202 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR21325(B F )05/95] RWARNING All utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. *[DR21400( ALL)03/95] *[DR21500( ALL)01/93] *[DR21600( ALL)03/94] % Brakes Front Disc Brakes The front disc brakes are self-adjusting. They do not require service other than periodic inspection for pad wear. *[DR21900(BEF )10/94] *[DR22000(BEF )03/95] Rear Drum Brakes *[DR22100( ALL)11/89] *[DR22200(BEF )08/94] Hydraulic Power Brakes *[DR22300( ALL)11/89] The brake light in the instrument cluster will light for low brake fluid in the common brake fluid reservoir. The rear drum brakes are self-adjusting. Automatic adjustment occurs when the brakes are applied while “backing up.” If normal operation does not include much backing, adjust the brakes when they seem “low,” using the procedure under If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is Low in this chapter. The hydraulic brake system is made up of two independent hydraulic circuits. One hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to the front disc brakes and the other hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to the rear drum brakes. These two circuits are supplied by a common hydraulic brake fluid reservoir, with a fluid level sensor. 203 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR22400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING An increase in pedal travel will result in reduced braking capability. The brake system should be checked immediately. [DR22905(B )08/94] Anti-lock Brake System *[DR22910(B )08/94] Your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-lock Braking System (4WABS). The 4WABS helps the driver to maintain vehicle control by preventing wheel lockup during hard braking. *[DR22915(BE )03/94] The 4WABS operates with a computer that is able to optimize vehicle control during braking on varying tire and road conditions by modulating the brake pressure at each of the front wheels and the rear axle. This “pumping action” is similar to the driver “pumping” the brakes but happens at a much faster rate. *[DR22920(BE )05/95] RWARNING The Anti-lock system does NOT assist the vehicle in stopping quickly on wet or icy surfaces. Heavy braking combined with poor road conditions could cause you to lose steering control of your vehicle. *[DR22925(BE )10/94] *[DR22930(BE )05/94] Using anti-lock brakes *[DR22935(BE )10/94] ❑ Apply the brake steadily. In the event of a The operation of a vehicle with 4WABS is not similar to the operation of normal brakes. Some differences exist and are listed below: panic stop, do NOT “pump” the brakes. “Pumping” the brakes during an Anti-lock stop will diminish braking effectiveness. 204 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR22940(BE )10/94] *[DR22945(BE )05/95] ❑ During an Anti-lock stop, the driver will notice a brake pedal pulsation and hear some noise from the engine compartment. This is an indication that the 4WABS system is working correctly and is normal. RWARNING The Anti-lock system does NOT decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes. Always leave enough room between the vehicle in front of you and your vehicle. *[DR22950(BE )05/95] 4WABS driver warning light [DR22955(BE )08/94] The 4WABS computer continuously monitors the system while driving for any electrical faults or system malfunctions. In addition, the 4WABS computer performs an initial system check called bulb proveout when the vehicle ignition is switched on. During bulb proveout, the amber “ABS” light on the instrument cluster will momentarily illuminate and then go out. *[DR22960(BE )03/93] NOTE: After starting the vehicle and upon initial drive-off, the driver may notice a single pulse of the brake pedal and a noise from the engine compartment. This is part of the initial system check and is normal. [DR22965(BE )08/94] Should a malfunction in the 4WABS system occur, the amber “ABS” light on the instrument cluster will come on and stay on indicating that the antilock system has been shut down and the vehicle needs to be serviced. Normal braking is not affected unless the red brake warning light is also illuminated. 205 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR22970(BE )10/94] NOTE: It is important to note that when the ABS Warning Light is illuminated the ABS system is disabled. The vehicle must be serviced immediately to restore the benefits of the Anti-lock system. *[DR22975(BE )10/94] NOTE: Mobile phones or radio transmitters not installed by Ford Motor Company may interfere with the Anti-lock System. Should the Anti-lock system activate unexpectedly or the Anti-lock Warning Light illuminate after installation of such a unit, have the installation of the unit checked. *[DR23000(BE M)12/89] If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low” *[DR23200(BEF )11/89] If brakes do not grip well, it may indicate the rear drum brakes need adjustment. To do this, drive the vehicle in reverse at 5 mph (8 km/h) on level, dry pavement. Stop the vehicle by firmly applying the brakes. Repeat this procedure four or five times. *[DR23250( ALL)11/89] If during normal operation the brake pedal seems “low”, it may indicate the need for a brake system inspection and/or service. You should have your brakes checked as soon as possible. *[DR23300( ALL)02/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does not affect the function of the brake system and is normal. However, if the squeal becomes annoyingly loud or increases significantly in frequency of occurrence, return the vehicle to your dealer for inspection. 206 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR23400(BEF )11/89] RWARNING Modifications to the suspension spring rates and/or vehicle ride height may adversely affect vehicle stopping ability. *[DR23500(BEF )07/92] *[DR23600(BEF )07/92] *[DR23700(BEF )07/92] If Brakes Pull *[DR23800(BEF )05/95] If pull occurs during the first 500 miles (800 km), make 10 moderately fast stops from 40 mph (65 km/h) and then perform the self-adjustment procedure above. It may be necessary to repeat this operation to properly seat new brake linings and pads. *[DR24000( ALL)01/93] *[DR24100( ALL)11/89] Stopping Distances *[DR24200( ALL)01/95] *[DR24300( ALL)05/95] Applying the Brakes % *[DR24400( ALL)05/95] ❑ Check tire pressure ❑ Perform the self-adjustment procedure described under If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low.” Stopping distances vary with different loads and driving conditions. Use caution when encountering new conditions and acquaint yourself with vehicle performance. Take full advantage of engine braking power when slowing down. Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the “squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. This allows the wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing down, which lets you steer properly. RWARNING Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will increase your vehicle’s stopping distance and may also cause brake damage. 207 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR24500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. *[DR24600( ALL)03/95] *[DR24650(BEF )01/95] *[DR24800(B F )12/91] Using the Parking Brake The parking brake should be used whenever you park your vehicle. The parking brake pedal is suspended just below the bottom of the instrument panel to the left of service brake and/or clutch pedals. To set the parking brake while parking your vehicle, press the brake pedal with your right foot and hold it while you push the parking brake pedal down firmly and fully with your left foot. *[DR24920(B FM)07/91] one third page art:0020893-A Parking Brake 208 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR24950(B F )03/95] RWARNING When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of the parking brake. Turn the key to LOCK whenever you leave your vehicle. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running. If you do not take these precautions, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. [DR24970(B F )05/95] *[DR24975(B F )05/95] When the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. RWARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. *[DR25000(B FM)03/93] *[DR25050( ALL)01/93] To release the parking brake, press the service brake pedal with your right foot and pull the parking brake release lever. RWARNING If the parking brake is fully released, but the Brake System light remains on, have the brakes checked immediately. They may not be working properly. 209 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR25100( ALL)01/95] The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, but you can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if the normal brakes fail. However, since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. *[DR25200( ALL)01/95] *[DR25250( ALL)01/95] *[DR25301( ALL)05/95] Driving Under Special Conditions Tips for Safe Driving As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handle differently from your previous vehicle. Use care until you become accustomed to its various features and driving characteristics. *[DR25350( ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of these maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently than anticipated. *[DR25501( ALL)02/95] *[DR25550( ALL)11/92] Wheel Spin *[DR25601( ALL)05/90] If the wheels spin during vehicle start-up, shift to a different gear: *[DR25750(B F )03/93] *[DR25800( ALL)03/93] ❑ Automatic Overdrive 4R7OW: use 2 (Second) ❑ Electronic 4-Speed Automatic Transmission *[DR25950(B F )05/90] ❑ Mazda R2 5-Speed Overdrive Manual: use 2 *[DR26301( ALL)01/89] Move forward slowly and evenly. If this does not work, try rocking the vehicle. *[DR26401(B F )05/91] For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD, and try to drive away. ❑ Extreme acceleration can cause the rear wheels to spin, perhaps resulting in reduced steering control. E4OD: use 2 (Second) (Second) 210 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR26550( ALL)05/90] *[DR26575( ALL)05/95] High Speed Driving Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits. *[DR26601( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. *[DR26625(BEF )12/91] *[DR26652(BEF )03/94] Speed limiter *[DR26701( ALL)01/95] % [DR26750( ALL)01/95] * *[DR26801( ALL)03/95] *[DR26850( ALL)03/95] Driving in Bad Weather *[DR26901( ALL)01/95] *[DR26951( ALL)01/95] *[DR27025( ALL)07/94] ❑ Drive slower than you normally would. ❑ Give your vehicle more distance to stop. ❑ To stop on ice, shift to Neutral below 10 *[DR27050( ALL)02/93] *[DR27101(B F )05/91] ❑ Consider using one of the lower gears. ❑ For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD, and try to % All models are equipped with an electronic engine control system (EEC) which limits the maximum engine speed and thus road speed in top gear. Vehicle operation is normal since the controlled maximum speed is above posted highway speeds in North America. Slippery roads Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads: ❑ Do not quickly move the steering wheel unless necessary. mph (16 km/h) and gently pump brakes. (Except with 4WAL) drive slowly away. 211 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR27150(B F )05/95] RWARNING To avoid losing control on slippery roads, do not downshift into Low with the automatic transmission when moving faster than 20 mph (32 km/h). Do not downshift into First with the manual transmission when moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). *[DR27350(B F )06/94] RWARNING The rear antilock brake system may not prevent brake lock-up on extremely slippery surfaces. Rear brake lock-up may also occur while driving in four-wheel drive because the transfer case couples the front and rear axles together. *[DR27450(BEF )03/95] *[DR27501(BEF )03/95] Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped) *[DR27550(BEF )03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. *[DR27601(BEF )05/95] RWARNING This axle provides added drive away traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one or more wheels are on a surface with poor traction. To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. 212 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR27651( ALL)01/95] *[DR27675( ALL)06/92] High water *[DR27701( ALL)05/90] Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that the water is below the bottom of the wheel hubs. *[DR27750( ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You may have limited traction or wet brakes, so allow extra stopping distance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual. *[DR27801( ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakes gently several times as your vehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry the brakes. *[DR27820( ALL)07/94] NOTE: If the transmission and transfer case is submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. *[DR27825( ALL)03/93] NOTE: All rear axle lube quantities must be replaced every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or if the axle has been submerged in water. Otherwise, the lube should not be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. *[DR27850( ALL)11/89] *[DR27901(B F )05/90] Rocking the vehicle *[DR27950( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud or snow), you may rock it out of the spot. Shift in a steady rhythm between forward and reverse gears. Allow the transmission to fully engage, then press lightly on the accelerator. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. This % Never attempt to cross water that is fast flowing or of unknown depth. For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD LOW, when the vehicle gets stuck and try to drive away. 213 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 may overheat the engine and transmission, causing damage to both. In addition, other vehicle systems and components may also be damaged. *[DR27975( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. *[DR28050(BEF )03/95] *[DR28101(BEF )01/95] *[DR28150(BEF )01/95] Driving With a Heavy Load There are limits to the amount of weight your vehicle can carry or tow. The total weight of your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers and cargo, should never be more than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that your vehicle carries over the front axle and rear axle should never be more than the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective axle. The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of replacement tires with higher weight limit than originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR. Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWR and GAWR limitations. *[DR28201(BEF )02/95] RWARNING If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged or you may lose control and injure someone. 214 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR28250(B F )03/91] Heavy duty front suspension package (option) *[DR28301(B F )03/91] This optional front suspension package is designed to handle the additional loads that will be imposed on the vehicle by adding aftermarket equipment, such as a snowplow. Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label for details. *[DR28750( ALL)01/93] *[DR28801( ALL)06/92] Vehicle/Trailer Loads *[DR28950(BEF )02/95] Trailer Towing (may require trailer tow option package) *[DR29001( ALL)03/91] Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of trailer you tow. [DR29010(B F )05/95] If your trailer is equipped with electric brakes, auxiliary battery, or back-up lamps, the optional 7 wire trailer towing electrical hook-up will be required on the vehicle. *[DR29025( ALL)09/92] Your trailer towing capability will vary based on the standard and optional equipment on your vehicle. Refer to the following Vehicle Loading/Towing Information and the Trailer Towing Tables to determine the specific towing capability of your vehicle. *[DR29050( ALL)02/92] ❑ Stay within the load limits when you tow. All vehicles may tow a Class I trailer provided the Gross Combined Weight (GCW) is less than or equal to the GVWR shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. For heavier trailer applications, refer to the towing information found later in this chapter. 215 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR29101( ALL)01/95] ❑ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your *[DR29151( ALL)01/95] ❑ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle *[DR29201( ALL)01/95] ❑ Service your vehicle more frequently if you *[DR29350( ALL)05/94] Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles (800 km). *[DR29401( ALL)06/92] Vehicle Loading/Towing Information *[DR29450(BEF )03/91] Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space with large or heavy loads. Maximum safe vehicle weights as well as tire, rim sizes and inflation pressures are specified for your vehicle at the assembly plant on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The Certification Label is located on the left front door lock facing or the door latch post pillar. *[DR29501( ALL)12/91] Trucks, unlike passenger cars, are basically custom vehicles designed to carry a load. Most owners start with a base vehicle and add production and dealer installed and/or aftermarket components to suit their tastes and purposes. Even trucks that are purchased for personal transportation only are likely to have considerable optional equipment, such as step bumpers and light bars, for example. vehicle for towing, making sure to use the right equipment and to attach it properly. (See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.) while you tow. (See Driving while you tow in this chapter.) tow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if you tow in this chapter.) 216 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR29525( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Passengers should not be allowed to ride in the cargo area. Persons not riding in a seat with a fastened seat belt are much more likely to suffer serious injury in a collision. Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harm to passengers. *[DR29551( ALL)03/91] Each additional item of equipment affects how much cargo a vehicle can carry. If a vehicle is overloaded, performance will suffer and service concerns may arise. *[DR29601(BEF )04/95] The following is a typical example of a Safety Compliance Certification Label and an explanation of how this information should be used: [DR29701(B )05/89] half page art:0020149-C Safety Compliance Certification Label 217 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR29950(BEF )06/92] Do not use the sample numbers on the Safety Compliance Certification Label shown. Use the actual numbers from your vehicle certification label. *[DR30001( ALL)06/92] Understanding Loading/Towing Information *[DR30050( ALL)03/94] The following terms are used to describe the ability to carry or tow a load: *[DR30101( ALL)01/93] *[DR30150( ALL)01/93] *[DR30200( ALL)01/93] *[DR30250( ALL)01/93] *[DR30301( ALL)01/93] *[DR30310( ALL)06/92] *[DR30320( ALL)06/92] *[DR30330( ALL)06/92] *[DR30340( ALL)06/92] *[DR30351( ALL)03/91] *[DR30401( ALL)03/94] ❑ Base Curb Weight ❑ Payload ❑ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ❑ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ❑ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ❑ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) ❑ Maximum Trailer Weight Rating ❑ Maximum Trailer Weight ❑ Trailer Weight Range *[DR30451( ALL)03/91] *[DR30501( ALL)03/91] Base Curb Weight The Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including fuel, coolants, lubricants, emergency tools, spare wheel and tire. It also includes any equipment that is standard on that model. It does not include passengers, cargo or optional equipment installed by factory, dealer, aftermarket supplier or customer. Payload Payload is the combined, maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants and optional equipment that the truck is designed to carry. It is Gross Vehicle Weight Rating minus the base curb weight. 218 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR30550( ALL)03/91] *[DR30601( ALL)03/91] Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) *[DR30650( ALL)10/94] It is important to remember that GVW is not a limit or a specification. If an owner loads up a vehicle and weighs it, that’s the GVW at that moment. If the owner piles on more of a load and weighs it again, that becomes the GVW...until such time as the vehicle is unloaded. *[DR30701( ALL)03/91] *[DR30750( ALL)10/94] Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) *[DR30801( ALL)01/93] *[DR30850( ALL)03/91] Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) *[DR30901( ALL)03/91] Your Safety Compliance Certification Label not only gives the GVWR, it also gives the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) which is the carrying capacity for each axle system. For trucks, the rear axle will be designed to carry more weight than the front. *[DR30950( ALL)06/92] The rating is based on the carrying capacity of the lowest rated axle and suspension component as well as other factors. This is why it’s so important to observe vehicle loading ratings. If you add base curb weight and the weight of a load (including passengers, cargo and optional equipment) being carried at a particular time, you get the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). To avoid overloading a vehicle, the owner should observe the manufacturer’s specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. The GVWR is the maximum total weight of base vehicle, passengers, optional components and cargo that a particular vehicle was designed to carry. We have all seen a car or a truck that is loaded down in the rear and riding high in the front. This is a dangerous condition that usually means that the rear suspension components are under severe strain and that vehicle handling is impaired. There is more to carrying a load than just payload or GVWR. 219 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 Overloading a vehicle punishes components and can lead to shortened service life or outright failure. *[DR31001( ALL)06/92] The capacity of the tires is included as part of the axle and suspension system, which is to be considered when determining the lowest rated component. Tires are rated to carry a specific maximum load at a specific maximum tire pressure. *[DR31050( ALL)06/92] Passenger car type tires when installed on light trucks and multipurpose passenger vehicles are rated at 10% lower load carrying capacity due to the differences in vehicle usages. *[DR31101(BEF )07/92] The vehicle must not be loaded to both the front and rear GAWR because the GVWR will be exceeded. The GAWR of the front and rear axles exceed the GVWR when added together to allow flexibility in fore and aft loading of cargo. *[DR31110( ALL)06/92] With the tires inflated to the specified pressure the total weight of your vehicle must not exceed the GVWR and GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. This includes full fuel tank(s), vehicle equipment, and occupants as well as the cargo load. *[DR31120( ALL)06/92] *[DR31130( ALL)06/92] GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) *[DR31140( ALL)06/92] *[DR31150( ALL)06/92] Maximum Trailer Weight Rating GCWR is the maximum combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer. The GCWR is specified by the manufacturer to indicate the combined maximum loaded weight that the vehicle is designed to tow. The maximum weight of a trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is specified by the manufacturer and is determined by subtracting the vehicle curb 220 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 weight for each engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. *[DR31160( ALL)06/92] *[DR31170( ALL)06/92] Maximum Trailer Weight *[DR31180( ALL)06/92] *[DR31190( ALL)06/92] Trailer Weight Range *[DR31301( ALL)03/91] *[DR31350( ALL)03/91] Calculating The Load *[DR31401( ALL)12/91] ❑ Obtain ratings from your Safety Compliance *[DR31450( ALL)09/93] — Refer to the following sample illustration to locate the various ratings on your Safety Compliance Certification Label. *[DR31501( ALL)03/91] — If you do not plan on pulling a trailer, do not include these ratings into your calculations. *[DR31550( ALL)03/91] The maximum weight of a trailer the loaded vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum weight of the trailer is determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. The trailer weight range is a specified range by weight, which the trailer must fall within, ranging from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. To know how much weight your vehicle can carry: Certification Label, and the Trailer towing specifications in the owner guide (refer to the Index) ❑ Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without cargo. 221 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR31601( ALL)03/91] ❑ Subtract the total weight of passengers, driver and optional equipment added by the factory, dealer or aftermarket supplier to determine how much cargo weight you can carry. *[DR31650(B FM)03/94] half page art:0020837-B Sample label *[DR31702( ALL)03/91] If you suspect that your payload is excessive, have your vehicle weighed at a highway weigh station or appropriate commercial facility. Weigh the total vehicle and trailer (if applicable), then separately weigh the vehicle at the front and rear wheels. And finally, weigh the trailer separately if applicable. 222 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR31751( ALL)03/91] *[DR31801(B FM)03/94] Use this chart to perform your calculations. twenty-six pica chart:0020838-D *[DR31851( ALL)03/91] NOTE: The Truck Safety Compliance Certification Label has two weight related entries that sometimes cause confusion. *[DR31901( ALL)10/94] Front Axle Reserve Capacity in Pounds: On the sample label, this value is given as 83 pounds (38 kgs). Does this mean that you are limited to adding only 83 pounds (38 kgs) of accessories to the front end capacity? Not exactly. This says that you can load 83 pounds (38 kgs) of options on the front axle, add 150 pound (68 kgs) 223 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 passengers to all seating positions, and add evenly distributed cargo in the box without exceeding the GAWR F. *[DR31950( ALL)06/92] It is possible to hang heavier equipment on the front as long as the vehicle owner/operator compensates. This can be accomplished, if necessary, by carrying fewer passengers, less cargo or positioning cargo more toward the rear, which has the effect of reducing the load on the front. Keep in mind that the GAWR F, GAWR R, nor the GVWR should ever be exceeded. *[DR32001( ALL)05/91] Total Accessory Reserve Capacity in Pounds: On the sample label this value is given as 112 pounds (51 kgs). This is a number that is related to government crash test standards, and only indirectly reflects on the amount of accessory weight that can be carried. *[DR32050( ALL)06/94] In the case of both these numbers (83 and 112 pounds) (38 and 51 kgs), the important thing to remember is that for safe operation, an owner/operator should calculate the amount and the distribution of all weights (passengers, accessory equipment and cargo). These combined weights should fall below the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR. *[DR32201( ALL)01/93] *[DR32251( ALL)10/94] Trailers *[DR32301( ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load or remove cargo accordingly. Towing a trailer safely means having the proper weight on the tongue (usually 10% of the trailer weight). Load-equalizing hitches on large rigs may transfer weight to each of the vehicle’s axles. This weight must be included in capacity calculations when determining if the vehicle is loaded within safe limits. 224 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR32350( ALL)02/95] RWARNING If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged or you may lose control and injure someone. *[DR32401( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight could result in engine damage, transmission/axle damage, structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury. *[DR32450( ALL)03/91] Using the Safety Compliance Certification Label find the axle code number and the engine type for your vehicle. *[DR32500( ALL)03/91] Use the appropriate Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) chart to find the Maximum GCWR for your type engine and rear axle ratio. *[DR32551( ALL)03/91] Subtract your Loaded Vehicle Weight from the Maximum GCWR found in the chart. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow and must fall below the maximum shown under Trailer Weight on the chart. 225 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 [DR33700(B )03/93] thirty pica chart:0020159-C 226 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 [DR33750(B )06/92] ten pica chart:0020470-B *[DR33780(B )06/94] Automatic Transmissions [DR33800(B )04/94] twenty-two pica chart:0020160-E 227 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR33880(B )04/89] Manual Transmissions [DR33900(B )03/94] twenty pica chart:0020161-D *[DR35500(BEF )02/91] *[DR35700(BEF )01/89] Required equipment *[DR35800(BEF )06/92] ❑ Super Cooling and Handling/Suspension ❑ Super Cooling is required with trailers over 2,000 lb (907 kg). Package or trailer towing package is required with trailers over 3,500 lb (1587 kg). 228 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR36500( ALL)01/95] *[DR36550( ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow *[DR36600( ALL)01/93] *[DR36800(B F )12/91] Hitches *[DR37000( ALL)12/92] Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious gases or water from entering. [DR37100(BE )03/93] Trailer Tow/Step bumper [DR37200(B )03/91] The step bumper has a built-in hitch and only requires a ball with a one inch shank diameter. The step bumper has a limited Class III capability (4,000 lb/1814 kg trailer weight and 400 lb/180 kg tongue weight). For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. If you are not certain that you are using the right equipment in the proper manner, see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if installed properly. Follow towing instructions of a reputable rental agency. 229 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR37550(B F )03/91] NOTE: The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either lower the hitch ball position or extend the hitch ball rearward will significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse. *[DR37575(B F )03/91] If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position a frame mounted trailer hitch must be installed. *[DR37800( ALL)11/89] *[DR37900( ALL)12/92] Safety Chains Always use safety chains between your vehicle and trailer. Cross chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. Connect safety chains to the vehicle frame or hook retainers. Never attach chains to the bumper. 230 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR38000( ALL)01/93] *[DR38100( ALL)03/95] Trailer Brakes Separate trailer brakes are required on most towed vehicles weighing over 1,500 lb (680 kg). *[DR38200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. *[DR38300( ALL)01/93] *[DR38400( ALL)11/89] Trailer Lamps [DR38417(B F )05/95] Your vehicle has been equipped for use with a 4-wire trailer tow electrical system (running lamps, right hand stop/turn, left hand stop/turn, and ground). *[DR38425(BEF )03/91] Class I and Class II Trailer Tow electrical wiring provides two circuits (right hand and left hand) to operate trailer stop/turn tail lamps. Each stop/turn circuit will operate one combination stop/turn light bulb (# 1157, 3157, 2357, or 3357) on the trailer. Never add more than one trailer light bulb to one circuit. [DR38429(B F )05/95] A wire harness (Ford part number F5TB-13A576-A) has been provided that connects to the frame wire harness at the rear of the vehicle and is compatible with most 4-wire trailer tow electrical systems. [DR38431(B F )05/95] Always check trailer and vehicle functions (i.e., stop/turn signal, and running lights) before operating your vehicle and trailer. [DR38433(B F )05/95] If your vehicle fails to function properly, do not operate your vehicle and trailer until corrections are made. Make sure your trailer lamps conform to Federal and local regulations. 231 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR38450( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. *[DR38500( ALL)01/95] *[DR38520( ALL)05/95] Driving while you tow Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can brake gradually. % If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long, steep grades, the speed control may shut off. *[DR38700( ALL)03/94] If your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic 4-Speed Automatic (E4OD or 4R70W) transmission, operate in Overdrive. Refer to the automatic transmission operation earlier in this chapter. *[DR38800( ALL)10/94] When descending a steep grade with a trailer, operate in Drive rather than Overdrive. If additional braking is needed, shift the automatic transmission gearshift into 2 (Second) gear or 1 (Low). [DR38810(B F )05/95] If your vehicle is equipped with a manual 5-speed transmission, operate in 4th gear. Overdrive (5th) gear should not be used when towing. [DR38811(B F )05/95] If additional braking is needed when descending a steep grade with a trailer, downshift the transmission into 3rd gear. *[DR38540( ALL)01/95] 232 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR38925( ALL)01/95] *[DR38950( ALL)08/93] Servicing your vehicle if you tow *[DR39000( ALL)01/93] *[DR39100( ALL)11/89] Trailer towing tips *[DR39200( ALL)05/90] Practice backing up. Back up very slowly, with someone outside at the rear of your trailer to guide you. Place your hand at the bottom of the steering wheel and move it in the direction you want the rear of the trailer to swing. Slight movement of the steering wheel results in a much larger movement of the rear of the trailer. *[DR39300( ALL)11/89] Allow more room for stopping with a trailer attached. Trailer brakes should be applied first, whether manually or automatically controlled, when approaching a stop. *[DR39400( ALL)11/89] For a good handling truck-trailer combination, the trailer tongue load should be approximately 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. *[DR39500( ALL)05/95] Make a thorough check of your equipment before starting out on the road. After you have traveled about 50 miles (80 km) stop in a protected area and double-check your hitch and electrical connections. Also check trailer wheel lug nuts for tightness. If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will need to be serviced more frequently than usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additional information. Before starting on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing in an area away from heavy traffic. Get to know the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination. 233 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR39600( ALL)11/89] When turning, drive slightly beyond the normal turning point so the trailer wheels will clear curbs or other obstructions. *[DR39725(B F )03/95] When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place the gearshift selector lever in P (Park) to increase the engine idle speed. This aids in engine cooling and air conditioner efficiency. If the engine overheats, move the function selector knob to VENT to stop the compressor and increase the engine speed for a short time. *[DR39900( ALL)05/90] Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels as follows: *[DR40000( ALL)11/89] *[DR40100( ALL)11/89] ❑ Apply the foot service brakes and hold. ❑ Have another person place the wheel chocks *[DR40200( ALL)11/89] ❑ With the chocks in place, release the foot *[DR40300(B F )03/91] ❑ For automatic transmissions — apply the under the trailer wheels. service brakes, making sure the chocks are holding. parking brake by pressing the service brake pedal down firmly with your right foot while applying the parking brake pedal with your left foot. For manual transmissions — apply the service brake and shift into N (NEUTRAL) while still maintaining pressure on the service brake pedal. Set the parking brake fully. *[DR40400(B F )08/94] 234 File:ltdrb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:26:57 1995 *[DR40500(B F )12/91] ❑ Shift an automatic transmission into Park (P). *[DR40600( ALL)01/93] *[DR40700( ALL)11/89] *[DR40800( ALL)11/89] *[DR40900( ALL)11/89] To start, after being parked on a grade: *[DR41000( ALL)11/89] ❑ Release the foot service brakes and move the *[DR41100( ALL)11/89] ❑ Apply the foot service brakes and hold while *[DR41260(B F )02/92] *[DR41275(B )01/93] Snowplowing Put the gearshift of a manual transmission in Reverse. If your vehicle is equipped with four-wheel drive make sure the transfer case is not in Neutral. ❑ Apply the foot service brakes and hold ❑ Start the engine ❑ Shift transmission into gear and release the parking brake vehicle uphill to free the wheel chocks another person retrieves the chocks. RWARNING Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. 235 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 Roadside Emergencies % *[RE00400( ALL)03/95] *[RE00500( ALL)01/95] *[RE00600( ALL)02/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the lights on or any electrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If this happens, you may be able to jump-start from a booster battery to start your vehicle. RWARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. *[RE00700( ALL)02/95] RWARNING To protect yourself when charging a battery, always shield your face and eyes. Make sure that you can breathe fresh air. *[RE00800( ALL)05/95] % RWARNING Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners. *[RE00900( ALL)05/95] % RWARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes, and clothing. 237 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE00925( ALL)05/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing, immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. *[RE00950( ALL)12/89] RWARNING Do not push-start your vehicle. You could damage the catalytic converter. For further information, see Jumper Cables in the Index. *[RE01000( ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these directions for preparing your vehicle to jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in the order they are given. If in doubt, call for road service. *[RE01100( ALL)03/95] *[RE01200( ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need to use a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if you connect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt generator set). *[RE01300( ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. *[RE01400( ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 238 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE01500( ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the jumper cables. *[RE01600( ALL)02/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Turning on the fan helps protect the electrical system from voltage surges. Turn off all other switches and lights in both vehicles to prevent possible damage to either vehicle’s electrical systems. *[RE01700( ALL)05/95] *[RE01800( ALL)03/95] Connecting the jumper cables 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect either jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you use the same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable is generally used for the positive terminals and the black for the negative ones. *[RE01900( ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. *[RE02000( ALL)05/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the discharged battery. *[RE02100( ALL)04/95] 4. Connect the other end of the second cable to a good metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. % *[RE02200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 239 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE02300( ALL)06/93] one third page art:0020262-C Attaching jumper cables *[RE02500( ALL)03/95] *[RE02600( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way of moving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a moderate speed. *[RE02700( ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and then start the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries before the vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after several attempts, there may be a different problem. *[RE02800( ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a few minutes to charge the discharged battery. *[RE02900( ALL)03/95] *[RE03000( ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the reverse order. Remove the negative (s) end of the jumper cable from the metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. *[RE03100( ALL)05/95] 2. Remove the negative (s) cable from the booster battery. *[RE03200( ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery. % 240 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE03400( ALL)05/95] 4. *[RE03500( ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions. Drive it around for a while with all electrical accessories turned off to let the battery recharge. You may need to use a battery charger to fully recharge the battery. *[RE03550( ALL)03/95] If you need to replace your battery, see Battery in the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter. *[RE03600( ALL)03/95] *[RE03700( ALL)01/95] Changing a Tire % *[RE03800( ALL)03/95] *[RE03900(BEF )01/95] *[RE04275(BEF )05/95] Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from the discharged battery. If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers. The Conventional Spare Tire If you have the conventional spare tire, you can use it as a spare or as a regular tire. This spare tire is identical to the other tires that come with your vehicle, although the wheel may not match. RWARNING To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. *[RE04280(BEF )10/94] Extended use of other than matching size spare tires on a Traction-Lok axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. 241 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE05100(BEF )03/95] Spare Tire Location [RE07700(B )05/90] The spare tire for your Bronco is mounted inside on a carrier at the right rear quarter panel unless you have an optional outside mounted spare tire. To remove the spare tire, remove the wing nut and plate. If so equipped, use a door key to unlock the lock assembly and remove the plate. To stow the spare tire, place the wheel on the bolt and tighten the plate and wing nut, or lock assembly, if so equipped. [RE07800(B )02/89] one third page art:0020271-A Inside spare tire assembly [RE08100(B )05/90] one third page art:0020322-C Spare tire mount [RE08300(B )01/89] The optional outside mounted spare tire is mounted on a swing-away carrier that hinges on the outside right rear corner of the truck. 242 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 [RE08400(B )01/89] To remove the outside mounted spare tire: [RE08450(B )05/90] quarter page art:0020275-A Removal and installation of spare tire cover [RE08500(B )05/90] 1. Lift the edge of the spare tire cover behind the top of the tire and slide the cover over the tire and downward. [RE08600(B )01/89] 2. Remove the security lock, retaining nut and mounting plate. [RE08700(B )01/89] 3. Slide the tire outward and lift off the carrier. [RE08800(B )01/89] If you have difficulty removing the retaining nut, turn the nut counterclockwise by using the tapered end of the lug nut wrench in one of the slots at either end of the retaining nut. [RE08900(B )05/89] To stow the outside mounted spare tire: [RE09000(B )01/89] 1. Place the spare tire on the carrier over the bolt, styled side in. [RE09100(B )01/89] 2. Place the plate on the bolt and tighten the retaining nut securely. [RE09200(B )01/89] 3. Install security lock. [RE09300(B )02/89] 4. Position the cover over the edge of the tire with the drainage eyelet at the bottom. Slide the cover upward, wrapping it around the edge of the tire until the cover is completely fitted. 243 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 [RE09400(B )05/90] NOTE: If your truck has optional aluminum wheels, you should slip the anti-scratch spacer over the “J” bolt between the tire and carrier to prevent scratching the aluminum styled-side surface. [RE09500(B )05/91] one third page art:0020273-C Optional outside mounted spare tire and carrier *[RE15100(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Make sure the spare tire and jacking equipment are stowed and secured in the proper storage location. *[RE15200( ALL)03/95] *[RE15250( ALL)12/91] Preparing to Change the Tire *[RE15300(B F )03/91] 1. *[RE15335(B F )12/91] NOTE: Make sure the ignition is in the OFF position. % NOTE: To lift your vehicle by other than the front or rear jacking points, be sure to use only hoist adapters with a wide contact surface. 244 Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. If you have an automatic transmission, put the gearshift in Park. If you have a manual transmission, put the gearshift in Reverse. Set the parking brake and block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire that you are changing. File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE15350(B F )06/94] If you have a four-wheel drive vehicles with manual locking hubs, put transfer case lever in 2H, 4H, or 4L. *[RE15375(B F )05/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) or 1 (First). To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block the wheel (both directions) that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire that is being changed. *[RE15400(B F )05/95] RWARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. [RE15435(B F )05/95] When the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. *[RE15440(B F )05/95] RWARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. *[RE15550(BEF )05/95] *[RE15800(B F )10/92] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack. The jack and lug wrench are stowed under the hood on the right front fender inner panel, and the jack handle is on the radiator support. 245 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE15900(B F )06/93] half page art:0020286-E Jack and assembly location *[RE16800(BEF )12/91] 3. Use the tapered end of the lug nut wrench to unscrew wheel ornaments attached by retaining screws. Remove any wheel trim. Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench behind wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off. *[RE16900(BEF )10/89] 4. Loosen the wheel nuts by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do not remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground. 246 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 % Removing and Replacing the Tire [RE17100(B F )02/95] 1. *[RE16950(BEF )05/95] Insert the jack handle into the jack and use the handle to slide the jack under the vehicle. *[RE17175(BEF )05/95] RWARNING To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. *[RE17200(BEF )05/95] RWARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire. *[RE17300(BEF )01/95] [RE18000(B )01/89] 2. Positioning the jack a. To raise a front wheel or a rear wheel, place the jack as shown in the following illustrations. [RE18100(B )01/89] one third page art:0020295-A Jacking point 247 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 [RE18551(BE )11/89] one third page art:0020296-A Jacking point b. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. *[RE18701(B )08/91] *[RE21151(BEF )10/92] one third page art:0020939-B *[RE21400(BEF )01/95] 3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench. *[RE21500(BEF )01/95] *[RE21700(B )01/95] 4. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire. 5. Thread the lug nuts on the wheel studs with the beveled face toward the wheel. Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snug against the wheel but do not tighten. *[RE22200(BEF )01/95] 6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 248 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE22300(BEF )01/95] 7. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown in the following illustration. *[RE22400(B )12/89] quarter page art:0020312-B Lug nut tightening sequence *[RE23400(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Use of wheels or lug nuts other than original equipment could cause damage to the wheel or mounting system and allow the wheels to come off while the vehicle is in motion. *[RE23500(BEF )01/95] 8. Replace any wheel covers, ornaments, or hub caps that your vehicle has. Make sure that they are screwed or snapped into place. [RE23615(BEF )02/95] 9. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. (Make sure jack is securely fastened so it doesn’t rattle when you drive.) The carrier is designed to hold the temporary spare which comes with your vehicle. The stowage of a full size tire in the spare tire carrier may damage the tire or the vehicle. The flat full size tire should be stowed securely in the vehicle until it can be repaired. *[RE23700(BEF )01/95] *[RE23800(B )06/93] 10. Unblock the wheels. Retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation and at intervals specified in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. 249 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE24200( ALL)10/89] Also retighten to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) of operation after any wheel change or any time the lug nuts are loosened. *[RE24301( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Failure to retighten wheel lug nuts at mileages specified could allow wheels to come off while the vehicle is in motion. [RE24330(B )02/89] eight pica chart:0020314-A *[RE24397(BEF )02/95] If the Engine Cranks But Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision *[RE24400(BEF )04/95] *[RE24500(BEF )03/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch *[RE24600(BEF )01/95] For information on how to check and reset the fuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index. If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. 250 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE24700( ALL)05/95] *[RE24875( ALL)] Towing Your Vehicle If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. Recommended towing options include wheel lift towing or flat bed towing. [RE24925(ALL )02/95] half page art:0001463-A *[RE24950( ALL)] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind of vehicle you have. A towing 251 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 manual is available from Ford Motor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck driver refer to this manual for the proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. *[RE26300(B F )06/94] Towing Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles With a Lever-Operated Transfer Case *[RE26400(B F )06/94] ❑ Place transmission gearshift (automatic or *[RE26425(B F )06/94] ❑ Lock steering wheel straight ahead if vehicle *[RE26450(B F )12/89] ❑ Set manual locking hubs in FREE position or *[RE26475(B F )06/94] NOTE: Confirm by observation that the front driveshaft is not rotating prior to towing with the rear wheels off the ground. *[RE26500(B F )06/94] *[RE26615(B F )03/91] ❑ Place transfer case in N (Neutral). manual) in N (Neutral). is to be towed with rear wheels off the ground. disengage the automatic locking hubs by shifting the transfer case to 2H and drive the vehicle in the opposite direction for a minimum of 10 feet (3 meters) in a straight line. NOTE: The transfer case neutral setting is located between 4H and 4L. In order to place the transfer case in neutral, first place the lever in the 4H position, then push down (toward the ground) on the shift knob and at the same time pull slightly rearward until the lever is between the 4H and 4L position. With the ignition in the on position, both 4x4 and LOW RANGE indicator lights will be off when the transfer case is in neutral. These lights will also be off when the transfer case is in the 2H position. 252 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE26650(B F )06/94] There are no wrecker or recreational vehicle towing restrictions on method or distance if the above preparations are made. *[RE26700(B F )06/94] ❑ Vehicle speed should not exceed 55 *[RE26800(B F )06/94] Towing Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles With Touch Drive Electric Shift Transfer Case *[RE26900(B F )06/94] ❑ Place transmission gearshift (automatic or *[RE27000(B F )05/90] *[RE27050(B F )05/90] ❑ Place transfer case in 2H. mph (88 km/h). This applies with the front wheels off the ground, the rear wheels off the ground, or both front and rear wheels on the ground. manual) in N (Neutral). NOTE: Both the 4 x 4 and LOW RANGE indicator lights in the instrument panel will be off when the transfer case is in 2H. *[RE27200(B F )06/94] ❑ Lock steering wheel straight ahead if vehicle *[RE27301(B F )06/94] ❑ When towing your vehicle with the rear *[RE27350(B F )06/94] NOTE: Confirm by observation that the front driveshaft is not rotating prior to towing with the rear wheels off the ground. is to be towed with rear wheels off the ground. wheels off the ground, the front axle automatic locking hubs must first be disengaged by shifting the transfer case to 2H and moving the vehicle forward for a minimum of 10 feet (3 meters) in a straight line. Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 55 mph (88 km/h) while towing. 253 File:ltreb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:48 1995 *[RE27400(B F )11/92] ❑ When towing your vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground or all four wheels on the ground and the driveshafts connected, do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) or transmission damage could result. If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) is exceeded, disengage the automatic locking hubs and disconnect the rear driveshaft from the axle and secure. (Max speed 55 mph [88 km/h] with driveshafts disconnected.) *[RE27500(BEF )03/91] RWARNING Never use a tow bar that attaches to the bumper when you tow your vehicle. This could damage the bumper and cause an accident. 254 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 Customer Assistance % *[HS00205( ALL)06/94] *[HS00210( ALL)05/95] *[HS00215( ALL)06/94] *[HS00220( ALL)06/94] *[HS00225( ALL)06/94] *[HS00230( ALL)06/94] *[HS00235( ALL)06/94] *[HS00240( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators that put you in touch with the help you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle. This complimentary service is provided to you throughout your warranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (3 years or 60,000 km), whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside Assistance coverages beyond this period, through Ford Auto Club, contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer (not available in Canada). Roadside Assistance will cover the following: ❑ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire. ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead. ❑ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out. ❑ Bring you fuel if you run out. ❑ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing and repossession). 255 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 *[HS00245( ALL)06/94] *[HS00250( ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance *[HS00255( ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). *[HS00260( ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). *[HS00300( ALL)01/95] *[HS00400( ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Complete the card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how to get service or maintenance for your vehicle. % Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada) *[HS00600(BEF )04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may, however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be able to resolve your concern. *[HS00700( ALL)03/95] If you are not satisfied with the service you received from your dealership’s service department, talk to the service manager at the dealership. If you still are not satisfied, talk to the owner or general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you will have your concern resolved at this level. *[HS00525( ALL)03/95] 256 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 *[HS01000( ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to be serviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership that may be able to help. *[HS01010( ALL)04/95] % [HS01025( ALL)03/95] * In the U.S., contact: one inch art:0060100-E *[HS01050( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. *[HS01075( ALL)04/95] % one inch art:0060101-C *[HS01200( ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available when contacting Ford Customer Assistance: *[HS01300( ALL)04/95] ❑ your telephone number (both business and *[HS01400( ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where the *[HS01500( ALL)03/95] *[HS01550( ALL)03/95] *[HS01600( ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle ❑ the date purchased ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle home) dealership is located 257 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 *[HS01700( ALL)03/95] ❑ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) *[HS02200( ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada. (listed on your owner card) % The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only) *[HS02400( ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary, independent dispute-settlement program available free to owners or lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles. *[HS02500( ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without incurring obligations. *[HS02600( ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board Review? *[HS02700( ALL)03/95] The Board reviews all product performance and service complaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln Cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks under warranty that have not been resolved by a dealer or Ford Motor Company. *[HS02750( ALL)03/95] *[HS02800( ALL)01/95] *[HS02900( ALL)01/95] *[HS03100( ALL)01/95] *[HS03200( ALL)01/95] The Board does not review issues involving: *[HS03300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty *[HS02300( ALL)02/95] ❑ A non-Ford product ❑ A non-Ford dealership ❑ A vehicle sales transaction ❑ A request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless incidental to a service or product complaint being reviewed 258 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 *[HS03400( ALL)01/95] *[HS03450( ALL)01/95] ❑ Alleged liability claims ❑ Property damage where such damage is *[HS03500( ALL)01/95] *[HS03600( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cases currently in litigation ❑ Vehicles not used primarily for personal, *[HS03650( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on which applicable express written new vehicle warranties have expired at receipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochure for California purchasers/lessees. *[HS03700( ALL)04/95] *[HS03800( ALL)04/95] *[HS03900( ALL)04/95] *[HS04000( ALL)04/95] *[HS04200( ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work? *[HS04300( ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warranty start date), you have a right to make an oral presentation before the Board by indicating your choice on the application. Also, oral presentations may be requested by the Board. A decision is made by the Board by simple majority vote. *[HS04350( ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials related to each complaint and, based on the available information, arrive at a fair and impartial significant when compared to the economic loss alleged under the warranty dispute family, or household purposes The Board has four members: ❑ three consumer representatives ❑ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of their business leadership qualities. 259 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 decision. Decisions are based on the written statements and any oral presentations made by each of the involved parties. *[HS04400( ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some cases will take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board will make every effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it receives the customer application form. *[HS04500( ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board will mail you its decision in writing. It will also provide you with a form to indicate your acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, but customers may have other options available to them under state or federal law. *[HS04600( ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be introduced into evidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that may be initiated. *[HS04700( ALL)01/95] *[HS04800( ALL)04/95] How Do You Contact the Board? Write to the Board at the following address to request a brochure/application. You will be sent a brochure and a one-page customer application form. The form should be completed and mailed to the same address. *[HS04900( ALL)02/93] one inch art:0060102-B 260 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 *[HS05100( ALL)04/95] *[HS05200( ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process? *[HS05300( ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs the following information: *[HS05400( ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents and *[HS05500( ALL)04/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicle *[HS05600( ALL)04/95] *[HS05700( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the time *[HS05800( ALL)04/95] *[HS05900( ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you the *[HS06000( ALL)04/95] ❑ a brief description of your unresolved *[HS06100( ALL)05/95] ❑ a brief summary of actions that were taken *[HS06200( ALL)05/95] ❑ the names *[HS06300( ALL)04/95] ❑ a description of the action you want done to *[HS06305( ALL)04/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review, an explanation will be mailed to you. Your application will be reviewed and if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating the file number assigned to your application and the local Board address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford Motor Company representative are asked to submit statements. maintenance or repair orders that relate to the case identification number of repair vehicle or who serviced your vehicle complaint with the dealer and Ford Motor Company (if known) of all people you contacted at the dealership resolve your concern. 261 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 *[HS06310( ALL)04/95] Ford of Canada does not have a Dispute Settlement Board. If you have a problem that cannot be resolved by an agreement among you, Ford of Canada, and the Ford dealer, contact the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). In many areas of Canada, CAMVAP will help resolve the problem and, if necessary, will arrange for the matter to be arbitrated. *[HS06320( ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) *[HS06340( ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. *[HS06360( ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. *[HS06380( ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 262 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 % Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada *[HS06500( ALL)05/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure local regulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle. Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether you should import your vehicle to that country. *[HS06600( ALL)05/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle needs, contact a district or owner relations office before you leave the U.S. or Canada. *[HS06700( ALL)05/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emissions control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company is not responsible for any damage that is caused by use of improper fuel. *[HS06800( ALL)05/95] You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel. *[HS06900( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write to: *[HS06400( ALL)05/95] *[HS07000( ALL)05/95] one inch art:0060103-H 263 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 *[HS07100( ALL)05/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can direct you to the appropriate Ford affiliate office. *[HS07200( ALL)05/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your Vehicle Identification Number and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations. *[HS07700( ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada Customer Assistance *[HS07800( ALL)03/95] *[HS07850( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. *[HS07950( ALL)03/95] one inch art:0060101-C 264 File:lthsb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:25:09 1995 % Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) *[HS08200( ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between a vehicle owner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of its dealers (that all parties can agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). *[HS08300( ALL)05/95] CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’s dispute resolution process as outlined under “Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada)” earlier in this chapter. *[HS08400( ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the program can obtain an information booklet from your dealer or contact the Provincial Administrator, Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address or telephone number shown below. *[HS08450( ALL)05/95] O & P Services 595 Bay Street — Suite 300 Toronto, Ontario M5G 2C2 Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685 *[HS08100( ALL)03/95] 265 File:ltacb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:24:54 1995 Accessories *[AC00400( ALL)03/95] *[AC00500( ALL)04/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle A wide selection of accessories is available through your local authorized dealer. These fine accessories have been engineered specifically to fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. That is why Ford brand accessories are warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your dealer for complete warranty information and accessory availability. 267 File:ltacb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:24:54 1995 *[AC00600( ALL)03/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience [AC00900(B )05/95] twenty-two pica chart:0020758-I [AC01000(B )04/95] ten pica chart:0020759-F 268 File:ltacb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:24:54 1995 *[AC01900( ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. *[AC02000( ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulates the use of mobile communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones, and theft alarms — that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified technician. *[AC02100( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. For example, when operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. In addition, such systems may themselves be damaged or their operation affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers, and other transmitters whose power output is 5 watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) 269 File:ltacb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:24:54 1995 *[AC02200( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over the installation, design, or manufacture of such systems, Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result if you use this equipment. *[AC02400( ALL)02/89] ten pica chart:0020464-A 270 File:ltacb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:24:54 1995 [AC02800(B )02/95] thirty-six pica chart:0021245-B 272 File:ltacb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:24:54 1995 [AC02900(B )02/95] thirty-six pica chart:0021246-B 273 File:ltacb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:24:54 1995 [AC03000(B )02/95] thirty-six pica chart:0021247-B 274 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 Servicing Your Bronco % Service Made Easy *[SV00300( ALL)03/95] *[SV00400(BEF )01/95] *[SV00500(BEF )01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle. 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to be serviced. *[SV00600(BEF )01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible. To help you: *[SV00700(BEF )01/95] ❑ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in *[SV00800(BEF )01/95] ❑ When possible, we design parts — such as *[SV00900(BEF )05/94] ❑ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that *[SV01000( ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need to check and service regularly. *[SV01100( ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your dealership can provide the parts and service required. Check your Warranty Information Booklet to find out which parts and services are covered. Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner Guide. the engine compartment so that you can find them easily. the headlamp bulbs — that can be replaced without tools. makes tracking routine service for your vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. 275 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV01300( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that the Owner Maintenance Checks listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet be performed for the proper operation of your vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that your vehicle may need service. If you do notice something unusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly. *[SV01600(BEF )03/95] Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle *[SV01700(BEF )01/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. Here are some general precautions for your safety: *[SV01900( ALL)03/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running, *[SV02000(BEF )01/95] ❑ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed *[SV02100(BEF )01/95] ❑ Never get under a vehicle while it is *[SV02200(BEF )01/95] ❑ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking *[SV02500( ALL)03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To find out how the engine does this, see Battery in this chapter. avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in moving parts. Take appropriate precautions with long hair. space with the engine running, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. supported by a jack only. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands. materials away from the battery and all fuel-related parts. 276 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV02600( ALL)03/95] *[SV02660(B F )05/95] Working with the engine off: 1. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). *[SV02675(B F )01/95] 2. When the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. *[SV02700( ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the key from the ignition after you turn the engine off. *[SV02725( ALL)03/95] 4. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. *[SV02750( ALL)03/95] *[SV02660(B F )05/95] Working with the engine on: 1. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). *[SV02800(B F )01/95] 2. When the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. *[SV02900( ALL)02/95] RWARNING Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 277 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV02950(BEF )03/95] *[SV03000(B F )12/91] Opening the Hood 1. Pull the hood release handle, located next to the parking brake pedal. *[SV03050(BEF )12/91] 2. While applying downward pressure on the hood, push the hood latch handle located behind the grille near the center front of the vehicle to the left. *[SV03150(B F )01/89] 3. As you open the hood to its fullest extent, a clock spring will assist you and “snap” into position. The clock spring lift secures the hood at its fullest height. *[SV03300(BEF )03/91] one third page art:0020333-A Hood release handle 278 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV03600(B F )06/93] half page art:0020337-E Hood and support *[SV03775(B F )12/89] NOTE: Be sure to oil the hood latch every six months to maintain smooth operation. *[SV03900(BEF )05/90] Always attempt to lift the hood after closing to be sure it is securely latched. *[SV04500(BEF )04/95] *[SV04600(BEF )05/94] Engine Compartment % *[SV04750(BEF )05/89] [SV04800(B )05/89] *[SV05500(BEF )11/94] Your vehicle has one of the following types of engines: ❑ A 5.0 Liter EFI, V-8 engine, or ❑ A 5.8 Liter EFI, V-8 engine. The following pages show diagrams of each engine type and where to find items that you should regularly service. 279 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV05800(B F )04/95] full page art:0020345-I 5.0L/5.8L engine compartment service points 280 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV05900(BEF )04/95] *[SV05920(BEF )04/95] Cleaning the Engine *[SV05940(BEF )05/95] ❑ Extreme care must be used if a power washer *[SV05960(BEF )04/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of the *[SV05980(BEF )04/95] ❑ The alternator, distributor and air intake must *[SV06000(BEF )04/95] ❑ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is *[SV06100( ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank % A clean engine is more efficient because a buildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than usual. is used to clean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetrate sealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions. engine block or fuel injection pump, do not spray a hot engine or injection pump with cold water. be covered. Covering these components will help prevent water damage. running. Water getting into the engine may cause internal damage. [SV06300(B )01/89] one third page art:0020348-A Fuel filler door 281 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV06550(BEF )02/91] *[SV06600(BEF )10/94] Opening the Fuel Filler Door *[SV06700( ALL)01/95] *[SV06750( ALL)01/95] Removing the fuel cap *[SV06800( ALL)03/90] ❑ Unscrew the fuel cap by exerting pressure on *[SV06850( ALL)12/91] ❑ Turn the fuel cap 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn until a *[SV06900( ALL)03/93] ❑ Make sure that you follow the above fuel cap *[SV06950( ALL)03/91] To replace and secure the fuel cap; place it in position and rotate it clockwise until it clicks (ratchets). Doing so will not damage or break the fuel cap. The ratcheting mechanism allows the fuel cap to be sealed without overtightening. [SV06975( ALL)05/95] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an authorized Motorcraft or equivalent part. To open the fuel filler door of your vehicle, just insert your finger in the divot and pull the door open all the way. The proper instructions for removing the fuel cap are as follows: the plastic lock bar and rotating the fuel cap counterclockwise. hissing sound is heard. Wait until the hissing sound stops and then continue rotating counterclockwise to remove the fuel cap. removal instructions and use caution. Such caution will minimize the possibility of fuel spraying during removal of the fuel cap. *[SV07000( ALL)05/95] % RWARNING If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in the fuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to work improperly in a collision. 282 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV07025( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system. *[SV07050( ALL)05/95] RWARNING If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the cap. *[SV07060(BEF )11/89] A venting fuel tank is not an abnormal condition. It may be caused by: *[SV07061(BEF )03/90] ❑ Too volatile a fuel for the weather conditions. *[SV07062(BEF )11/89] ❑ Pulling a heavy load on hot days, or at high *[SV07063(BEF )11/89] ❑ Extended periods of idling with the engine *[SV07064(BEF )11/89] ❑ Parking vehicle in full sunlight for extended *[SV07500( ALL)05/95] *[SV07600( ALL)05/95] Choosing the Right Fuel *[SV07700( ALL)05/95] Vehicle inspection programs may detect misfueling. Under these circumstances, you may be required by law to make costly repairs at your own expense. The service stations sometimes sell winter grade fuel in the summer. altitudes. RPM increased above the normal idle range. periods on extremely hot days. Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle. Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law. Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle is damaged because you used the wrong fuel. 283 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV08710( ALL)04/95] *[SV08725( ALL)04/95] Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use regular unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 87. In most cases, it is not necessary to use a fuel with an octane rating higher than 87. At service stations, the octane rating is displayed on a label on the pumps. *[SV08900( ALL)05/95] one inch art:0060001-C Typical octane rating label *[SV09050( ALL)05/95] In some parts of the country, “regular” grade fuels are sold with octane ratings of 86 or even less, especially in high altitude areas. We recommend that you do not use these fuels. Always use a fuel with an octane rating of 87, even if it is sold as a “midgrade” or “premium.” *[SV09200( ALL)05/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. However, if a fuel with the recommended octane rating knocks heavily under all driving conditions or knocks lightly driving at cruising speed on level roads, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Persistent, heavy knocking can damage the engine. *[SV09435( ALL)05/95] *[SV09450( ALL)05/95] Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation problems when the engine is cold, it may be caused by fuel with low volatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If the condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. 284 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV09452( ALL)05/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehicle more responsive and maintains its good fuel economy and emissions by: *[SV09455( ALL)05/95] *[SV09460( ALL)05/95] *[SV09465( ALL)05/95] *[SV09470( ALL)05/95] ❑ protecting your fuel system from rusting. ❑ preventing the fuel lines from freezing. ❑ improving vehicle starting and warm-up. ❑ protecting the fuel system from vapor lock in *[SV09475( ALL)05/95] ❑ minimizing deposits in fuel injectors, *[SV09480( ALL)05/95] ❑ preventing your fuel system from “gumming *[SV09485( ALL)05/95] ❑ preventing your engine from knocking and *[SV09500( ALL)05/95] It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel. *[SV09875( ALL)04/95] *[SV09900( ALL)05/95] Gasolines for clean air [SV09950( ALL)04/95] Reformulated gasoline is also required in certain areas of the U.S. These fuels are designed to further reduce the emissions from your vehicle. very hot weather, which causes the engine to hesitate or stall and makes restarts difficult. combustion chambers, and on intake valves. up” when your vehicle is not used for long periods of time. pinging. Fuels in certain areas of the country are required to contain oxygenates to improve air quality. Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol (blended at no more than 10%), methanol or wood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% with cosolvents and additives), and MTBE or methyl tertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than 15%). 285 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV10000( ALL)04/95] *[SV10185( ALL)05/95] % Generally, you should not experience difficulties operating your vehicle on reformulated gasoline or on fuels containing oxygenates. We encourage you to use these fuels. Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels *[SV10195( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. *[SV10200( ALL)05/95] Gasoline and other automotive fuels are extremely flammable. Turn your vehicle off and do not smoke while refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks and other sources of ignition away from fuels. *[SV10205( ALL)03/95] Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Further, gasoline may be blended with methanol. Even small amounts of methanol can cause blindness and possibly death when swallowed. Therefore, never attempt to siphon any fuel by mouth. *[SV10210( ALL)03/95] If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison control center immediately. Do not delay calling a physician merely because no adverse effects are noticed at first; the toxic effects of a gasoline-methanol blend, including blindness, may not become apparent for many hours. If gasoline is swallowed, do not induce vomiting. If a gasoline-methanol blend is swallowed, induce vomiting under the direction of a physician or poison control center. *[SV10215( ALL)03/95] Gasoline and gasoline-methanol blends may contain small amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratory animals. Further, excessive inhalation of fuel vapors can cause headache, dizziness, nausea, 286 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 loss of coordination, and other symptoms which could interfere with your ability to safely operate your vehicle. To the extent possible, avoid breathing vapors while refueling. If fuel vapors are inhaled in excessive quantities, move the victim to fresh air and seek medical attention. *[SV10220( ALL)03/95] Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. When refueling, be careful not to splash fuel on yourself or your clothing. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash the skin thoroughly with soap and water. *[SV10225( ALL)05/95] Fuels can cause severe eye irritation and possibly eye damage. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with large amounts of water for 15 minutes, and seek medical attention. *[SV10230( ALL)05/95] You should be particularly careful if you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. There is a possibility that breathing the vapors of a gasoline-methanol blend, or skin contact with such a blend, may cause the same kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness could result. Consult a physician promptly if you experience an adverse reaction. 287 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV10300( ALL)02/95] *[SV10400( ALL)04/94] Filling the fuel tank RWARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. *[SV10500( ALL)01/95] *[SV10550( ALL)01/95] To fill the fuel tank properly: *[SV10600( ALL)01/95] 1. Remove the fuel cap by following the instructions above under Removing the Fuel Cap in this chapter. Proceed to add fuel to the tank only if your vehicle is on level ground. *[SV10700( ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel and put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel filler pipe. *[SV10800( ALL)05/95] 3. If you spill any fuel on the body of your vehicle, clean it off immediately. The fuel may dull or soften the paint if you do not wash it off. % 4. Replace the fuel cap completely when you are finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn until it is tight. It will click when it is fully tightened. *[SV11300( ALL)05/95] *[SV11400( ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel *[SV10900( ALL)05/95] % NOTE: Extinguish all lit cigarettes, other smoking materials, and any open flames before fueling your vehicle. If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop on level ground away from traffic. Add at least two gallons (8 liters) of fuel to start your vehicle again. If your vehicle is not on level ground, you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters) of fuel to start it. 288 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV11500( ALL)05/95] You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine. *[SV11600( ALL)05/95] *[SV11700( ALL)05/95] Fuel Economy *[SV11750( ALL)05/95] Do not calculate fuel economy during your vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle will normally use. *[SV11800( ALL)05/95] *[SV11900( ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy: 1. Fill the tank completely and record the inital odometer reading. *[SV12000( ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel record the amount (in gallons or liters) purchased. *[SV12200( ALL)05/95] 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill the fuel tank and record the final odometer reading. *[SV12225( ALL)05/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel economy. *[SV12250( ALL)05/95] *[SV12275( ALL)05/95] ❑ English: MPG = (total miles)/(gallons used). ❑ Metric: L/100K = (liters used) x 100/(total *[SV12300(BEF )05/95] Comparisons With EPA Fuel Economy Estimates *[SV12400(BEF )05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory tests under simulated road conditions and may not reflect the actual conditions you experience or your style of driving. The EPA fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achieve the fuel economy shown. % Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicle and can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers (L/100K). kilometers) 289 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV12500( ALL)05/95] *[SV12600( ALL)05/95] Improving Fuel Economy *[SV12700( ALL)05/95] *[SV12800( ALL)05/95] *[SV12900( ALL)05/95] *[SV13000( ALL)05/95] *[SV13100( ALL)05/95] *[SV13200( ALL)05/95] *[SV13300( ALL)05/95] *[SV13400( ALL)05/95] *[SV13500(BEF )05/95] The following decrease fuel economy: *[SV13550(BEF )05/95] ❑ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or *[SV13600( ALL)02/95] *[SV13610( ALL)04/95] Engine Oil Recommendations Fuel economy is affected by a number of variables which can reduce efficiency. You can improve fuel economy by understanding these variables and minimizing their effect. ❑ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance ❑ Driving with your foot on the brake ❑ Sudden stops ❑ Excessive speed ❑ Extended engine idling ❑ Heavy loads ❑ Underinflated tires ❑ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defroster and other accessories luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc. We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification ESE-M2C153-E and displaying the American Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on the front of the container. 290 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV13655( ALL)03/95] one third page art:0060020-D The API Certification Mark *[SV13670( ALL)01/95] *[SV13680( ALL)01/95] *[SV13690( ALL)04/95] % [SV13700( ALL)01/95] * Never use: [SV13701(B )06/95] For vehicles with 5.8L engines *[SV13710(BEF )03/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fuel economy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F (-25˚C). ❑ “Non-Detergent” oils ❑ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG ❑ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments % Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferred viscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be changed according to the maintenance schedule. [SV13735(B )03/95] For vehicles with 5.0L engines [SV13740( ALL)04/95] Engine oils with an SAE 10W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED for your vehicle which provide the best engine protection for all climates down to -5˚F (-20˚C). SAE 5W-30 engine oils may also be used down to -15˚F (-25˚C). *[SV13725( ALL)03/95] 291 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV13745( ALL)02/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferred viscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be changed according to the maintenance schedule. *[SV13775( ALL)01/95] *[SV13800( ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil *[SV13900( ALL)03/95] *[SV14000( ALL)02/95] Checking the engine oil level: 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a few minutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan. *[SV14050(B F )03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). *[SV14100( ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. *[SV14200( ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) and carefully pull it out of the engine. *[SV14300( ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, making sure it is fully seated. Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safe engine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time you put fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on level ground. *[SV14400( ALL)05/94] quarter page art:0010364-D Engine oil dipstick 292 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV14500( ALL)02/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oil level is below the “ADD 1 QT.” line, add engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is beyond the letter “F” in FULL, engine damage or high oil consumption may occur and some oil must be removed from the engine. *[SV14600( ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated. *[SV14800( ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if engine damage is caused by the use of improper engine oil. *[SV15000( ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil. *[SV16500( ALL)04/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per the following, whichever occurs first. *[SV16600(BEF )04/95] one third page art:0060618-C Oil change intervals 293 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV16625( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Idling the engine for extended periods will accumulate more hours of use on your vehicles than is actually indicated by the mileage odometer. Consequently, the odometer reading can be often misleading when determining the right time to change your engine oil and filter. *[SV16650(BEF )03/95] If you are using your Ford vehicle in a manner which allows it to remain stationary while the engine is running for long periods (door to door delivery, taxi, police, power/utility company trucks, or similar duty), then Ford recommends you increase the frequency of oil and filter changes to an interval equivalent to 200 ENGINE HOURS of use. Since most vehicles are not equipped with hourmeters, it may be necessary for you to approximate your idle time and plan oil/filter changes accordingly. *[SV16800( ALL)04/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additional information. *[SV17250( ALL)04/95] % NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. *[SV17275( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Continuous contact with USED motor oil has caused cancer in laboratory mice. *[SV17280( ALL)05/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap and water. 294 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV17300( ALL)03/95] *[SV17400( ALL)02/95] *[SV17700( ALL)10/89] Engine Coolant Checking the engine coolant Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects the engine from overheating in the summer and from freezing in the winter. Check the level of the engine coolant at least once a month, but preferably each time you stop for fuel. Simply look at the engine coolant recovery reservoir located in the engine compartment. To locate this reservoir, see the diagram of your vehicle’s engine under Engine types in this chapter. *[SV17750( ALL)03/95] If the engine coolant has not been checked for a long period of time the engine coolant reservoir may eventually empty. If the engine coolant reservoir empties, check the engine coolant level in the radiator. Read the following warnings before removing the radiator cap. If it is necessary to fill the radiator, refer to the Engine Coolant Refill Procedure in this chapter for instructions. *[SV17950(BEF )01/95] *[SV18000(B F )07/94] Adding engine coolant quarter page art:0020354-A Adding engine coolant 295 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV18150(B F )05/90] quarter page art:0020360-C Adding engine coolant *[SV18400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not put engine coolant in the container for the windshield washer fluid. *[SV18420( ALL)05/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or antifreeze could make it difficult to see through the windshield. *[SV18500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engine is running or hot. *[SV18600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Follow these steps to minimize risk of personal injury. *[SV18700( ALL)03/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. Even when the engine is cool, be careful when you remove the radiator cap. *[SV18800( ALL)03/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap and turn it slowly counterclockwise to the first stop. *[SV18900( ALL)03/95] *[SV19000( ALL)04/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to press, turn, and remove cap. 296 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV19100( ALL)03/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hot steam may blow out or hot engine coolant may even splash out. *[SV19500( ALL)01/93] *[SV19600( ALL)03/91] Freezing Protection *[SV19701( ALL)02/95] Add engine coolant only to the recovery reservoir. If the coolant level is low, add to the reservoir a 50/50 mixture of water and the type of engine coolant that Ford specifies. You may add water by itself only in an emergency, but you should replace it with a 50/50 mixture as soon as possible. *[SV19801( ALL)02/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an optimized formula that will protect all metals and rubber elastomers used in Ford engines for four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is not necessary and not recommended to use supplemental coolant additives in your gasoline powered vehicle. These additives may harm your engine cooling system. Follow the recommended service interval for changing your engine coolant. *[SV19851( ALL)04/94] NOTE: When you change or add engine coolant, it is important to maintain your engine coolant concentration between 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60% (-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your local climate conditions. Below 40% you will lose freeze protection and above 60% your engine may overheat on a warm day. The factory-installed solution of Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid and water will protect your vehicle to s35˚F (s37˚C). Check the freeze protection rating of the engine coolant at least once a year, just before winter. 297 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV19950( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Do not use an engine coolant that does not meet all 14 requirements of Ford Specification ESE-M97B44-A. The use of an improper coolant may void your warranty for the engine cooling system. Use only a premium nationally recognized brand name engine coolant. *[SV19960( ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the Ford Rotunda engine coolant recycling process and chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycled engine coolant or an equivalent recycled engine coolant that is certified by the supplier to meet Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. % NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. *[SV20001( ALL)01/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid or an equivalent engine coolant that meets Ford Specification ESE-M97B44-A. Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze and do not use engine coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. If you do not use the proper coolant, the aluminum radiator on your vehicle will corrode. *[SV20100( ALL)01/95] Leave the engine coolant in all year. Make sure that the coolant will not freeze at the temperature level in which you drive during winter months. Keep a mixture of engine coolant in your engine that has a protection rating of at least -34˚F (-37˚C), or whatever protection rating is appropriate for the climate in which you live. *[SV20125( ALL)03/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixture your vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refill capacities for fluids in the Index. *[SV19980( ALL)04/95] 298 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV20151( ALL)01/95] You may add water by itself only in an emergency, but you should replace it with a 50/50 or appropriate mixture as soon as possible. *[SV20200( ALL)01/95] Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if you have to add a quart (liter) of engine coolant more than once a month. *[SV20500( ALL)11/94] *[SV20600( ALL)10/89] Checking hoses *[SV20700( ALL)05/95] *[SV20800( ALL)10/89] *[SV20900( ALL)03/94] Engine coolant drain and flush 1. Turn off the engine and let it cool. Fully depressurize the engine cooling system by covering the radiator cap with a thick cloth and turning it slowly counterclockwise to the first stop. Step back while the pressure releases. *[SV20950( ALL)05/90] *[SV21000(B FM)05/90] 2. Remove the cap. 3. Attach a small hose to the drain tube at the bottom of the radiator. *[SV21200( ALL)05/90] 4. Let the engine coolant drain into a suitable container. Disconnect the lower radiator hose at the radiator connector and drain any remaining engine coolant into a container. *[SV21225( ALL)05/94] 5. Reconnect the lower radiator hose and close the radiator drain cock. *[SV21250( ALL)10/94] Proper procedures for flushing the cooling system can be found in the Truck Service Manual. % Inspect all engine and heater system hoses for deterioration, leaks and loose clamps before adding or replacing engine coolant. Make whatever repairs or replacements that are necessary using Motorcraft parts or their equivalents. To drain your vehicle’s engine coolant: 299 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV21300( ALL)02/95] *[SV21400( ALL)10/89] Engine coolant refill procedure *[SV21500( ALL)01/89] 1. Fill the radiator with a 50/50 mixture of the specified engine coolant concentrate and water. Allow several minutes for trapped air to escape (bubble out) and for engine coolant to flow through the radiator. *[SV21900( ALL)03/94] 2. Replace the radiator cap to its fully installed position, then back off to the first stop. This will prevent high pressure from building up in the cooling system during this part of the fill procedure. *[SV22100( ALL)10/89] 3. Start and idle the engine until the thermostat opens and the radiator upper hose becomes warm. *[SV22200( ALL)05/95] 4. Shut off the engine and allow the engine to cool. Cover the radiator cap with a thick cloth and cautiously remove it. Step back while the pressure releases. *[SV22500( ALL)10/89] 5. Finally, check the radiator and add more engine coolant if needed, following the procedures noted above. Reinstall the radiator cap securely, when finished. *[SV22525( ALL)05/90] 6. If more engine coolant is necessary, fill the overflow reservoir to the appropriate level marked on the bottle. After you have drained the engine cooling system: 300 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV22700(BEF )03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and Wipers *[SV22800(BEF )03/95] *[SV22900(BEF )01/95] Washer Fluid *[SV23200(BEF )03/95] *[SV23300(BEF )05/95] Adding washer fluid Check the level of the windshield washer fluid every time you stop for fuel. The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid is located in the engine compartment. RWARNING Do not put windshield washer fluid in the container for the engine coolant. *[SV23600(B F )02/92] quarter page art:0020360-C Adding windshield washer fluid *[SV23700(B )03/95] *[SV23850(BEF )01/95] % If the wiper blades still do not work properly after you clean them, you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly or the blade element. When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the instructions that come with them. Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather than plain water, because specially formulated washer fluids contain additives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanol should be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or local 301 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades, and windshield washer system. *[SV23900(BEF )10/89] If you choose to use a windshield washing solution that must be mixed, follow the manufacturer’s mixing instructions. Improperly mixed solutions may freeze unexpectedly. [SV24000(BEF )04/95] NOTE: The addition of shields to the front of the vehicle, as used to deflect bugs, may also adversely affect the washer system from delivering fluid to the windshield. Devices such as bug shields are not recommended to be added to your new Ford product. *[SV24500(BEF )03/95] *[SV24600(BEF )03/95] Wiper Blades % *[SV24700(BEF )03/95] *[SV24800(BEF )02/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Also check them whenever they seem less effective than usual. Such substances as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will damage your blades. To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply turn the ignition switch to ACC and turn your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a vertical position and turn the ignition to OFF. Do not move the wipers manually. Moving the wipers manually may damage them. 302 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV24900(BEF )03/01] *[SV25000(BEF )03/95] Wiper blade replacement *[SV25200( ALL)03/95] *[SV25300( ALL)03/95] Tires If the wiper blades still do not work properly after you clean them, you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly or the blade element. When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the instructions that come with them. Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them. Always follow these precautions: *[SV25400( ALL)04/95] ❑ Keep your tires inflated to the pressures that *[SV25500(BEF )02/95] ❑ Stay within the recommended load limits (see *[SV25600( ALL)02/95] ❑ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly *[SV25700( ALL)10/89] *[SV25800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Drive at safe speeds. *[SV25875( ALL)05/95] *[SV25900( ALL)05/95] are recommended. (See Checking the pressure of the tires later in this chapter.) Load limits in the Index). distributed. If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or go flat. Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits. RWARNING Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. 303 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV26000( ALL)03/95] *[SV26100( ALL)11/89] Checking the pressure of the tires At least once a month, check the pressure in all your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, that is, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can find the proper cold pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. *[SV26150( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. *[SV26200( ALL)02/95] *[SV26300( ALL)02/95] Tire inspection and maintenance *[SV26400( ALL)10/89] Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If you suspect internal damage to the tire, have it demounted and checked. You may need to repair or replace it. *[SV26410( ALL)11/89] *[SV26420( ALL)11/89] Wheel inspection and maintenance *[SV26430( ALL)06/93] Front wheel bearings require periodic repacking and adjustment as specified in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. Loose or worn front wheel bearings tend to let the vehicle wander or shimmy, and can eventually cause excessive tire wear. Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air to leak from the tire, and make the necessary repairs. Check for damage that would affect the runout of the wheels. Wobble or shimmy will eventually damage the wheel bearings. 304 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV26435( ALL)05/95] Whenever a wheel is removed and then re-installed, always remove any corrosion that may be present on the mounting surface of the wheel and/or the surface of the hub, drum or rotor that contacts the wheel. *[SV26440( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Installing wheels without good metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surface can cause the wheel lug nuts to loosen and could allow the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion. *[SV26450(BEF )03/95] *[SV26460(BEF )03/95] Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped) This axle provides added drive away traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one or more wheels are on a surface with poor traction. *[SV26470(BEF )05/95] RWARNING To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. *[SV26500( ALL)02/95] *[SV26600( ALL)03/95] Tire Rotation *[SV26700(BEF )07/92] Rotate the tires according to the following diagram. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. If your light truck has a temporary spare tire, do not include it in the tire rotation pattern. % Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them at the mileage shown in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet which came with your vehicle. 305 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV26750(BEF )03/90] In situations where the tires differ from front to rear (snow/traction), simply rotate using a side to side pattern. *[SV26800(BEF )06/93] half page art:0020364-A Tire rotation pattern *[SV26900(BEF )10/89] After each rotation, adjust individual tire pressure as specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. Tighten wheel lug nuts to the required torque specification and retighten again after 500 miles (800 km). *[SV27000(BEF )10/94] If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, you may demount the full size, non-temporary spare tire (if so equipped) and remount on an aluminum wheel to rotate the spare tire into your vehicle’s rotation pattern. 306 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV27300( ALL)04/95] *[SV27400( ALL)01/95] % Replacing the Tires Replace any tires that show wear bands. When your tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16 inch (1.59 mm) of tread left. *[SV27500( ALL)10/89] quarter page art:0060006-A Wear band *[SV27600( ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may need to replace them before a wear band appears across the entire tread. Some spots wear more heavily than others. *[SV27700( ALL)03/90] Your wheels and tires are match-mounted for improved ride. Before you begin to repair a tire, mark the wheel and tire so that they are properly aligned when remounted. This will ensure that the tires will continue to give you the same ride level. 307 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV27851( ALL)01/95] RWARNING When replacing full size tires, never mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the decal. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. *[SV27860( ALL)03/90] RWARNING Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, load-carrying capacity, and tread design (e.g. “All Terrain”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. *[SV27885( ALL)04/95] RWARNING Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger size tires. *[SV27895( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the handling of the vehicle and make it easier to lose control and roll over. *[SV27900( ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. 308 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV28200(B )06/93] full page art:0020367-E Tire identification chart 309 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV28700(B )05/95] RWARNING Use of aftermarket wheel assemblies may damage your vehicle or cause accidents resulting in serious injuries. *[SV28800( ALL)04/95] *[SV28900( ALL)03/95] Wheel and Tire Matching *[SV31100(BEF )04/95] *[SV31200(BEF )01/95] Snow Tires and Chains % See an authorized tire dealer for proper servicing procedures. Wheels and tires must be properly removed, matched and remounted to maintain the best possible ride. The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads that provide traction in rain or snow. However, during the winter months in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and occasionally chains for your tires. *[SV31300(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. *[SV31400(BEF )02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the law requires them where you live. If you choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be aware of the following: *[SV31500(BEF )01/95] ❑ Make sure the chains are the right size for *[SV31600(BEF )01/95] ❑ Put the chains on tightly with the ends held your tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. down securely. Verify that no chain touches any wiring, brake lines, or fuel lines. Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. 310 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV31700(BEF )01/95] ❑ Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rub *[SV31800(BEF )10/94] *[SV31900(BEF )05/94] ❑ Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible. ❑ Remove tire chains at the first opportunity *[SV31950(BEF )05/91] ❑ Make sure your suspension insulation and *[SV31975(BEF )04/95] *[SV31980(BEF )05/95] Cleaning the Wheels *[SV31985(BEF )04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes are abrasive. *[SV32100( ALL)03/95] *[SV32200( ALL)02/95] Battery % *[SV32500( ALL)02/95] or bang against your vehicle, stop the vehicle and tighten the chains. If you continue to hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. after using them on snow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads. bumpers are not missing or worn to avoid damage to your vehicle. Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover to remove grease and tar. Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery. When the original equipment battery is replaced under warranty, it may be replaced by a Motorcraft Low-Maintenance Battery. The Low-Maintenance Battery has removable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and for adding water, if necessary. The electrolyte level should be checked at least every 24 months or 24,000 miles (40,000 km) in temperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C) and more often in temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the level indicator. Do not overfill. 311 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV32700( ALL)02/95] If the level gets low, you can add tap water to the battery, provided the water isn’t hard or doesn’t have a high mineral or alkali content. However, if possible you should refill the battery with distilled water. If the battery needs water quite often, have the charging system checked for a possible malfunction. *[SV32725( ALL)03/95] *[SV32750( ALL)04/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment % Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acid batteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility for disposal. *[SV32775( ALL)03/95] one inch art:0000983-A Battery recycling symbol *[SV33200( ALL)01/95] RWARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lit tobacco to come near the battery. When charging or working near a battery, always cover your face and protect your eyes, and also provide ventilation. *[SV33300( ALL)05/95] % RWARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes, and clothing. 312 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV33305( ALL)05/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing, immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. *[SV33400( ALL)05/95] % RWARNING Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners. *[SV33500( ALL)01/95] *[SV33601( ALL)04/95] Automatic Transmission Fluid Under normal driving conditions automatic transmission fluid should be changed every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 21,000 miles (34,000 km) if under severe duty conditions. However, if the transmission is not working properly, for instance, the transmission may slip or shift slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid leakage, the fluid level should be checked. [SV33605( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Except E4OD transmission, there is no 30,000 mile (48,000 km) sheduled transmission fluid change requirement. [SV33615( ALL)05/95] Transmission fluid, filter and seal assembly should be changed every 21,000 miles (34,000 km) only under any of the following conditions. [SV33620( ALL)04/95] ❑ Extended periods of high speed driving during hot weather at/or above +90˚F (+30˚C). [SV33625( ALL)04/95] ❑ Towing a trailer for distances over 1,000 miles (1,600 km) per trip. [SV33630( ALL)04/95] ❑ Accumulating 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or more per month. 313 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV33635( ALL)04/95] ❑ Continuous operation and/or extensive idling (a delivery service as an example). [SV33640( ALL)04/95] ❑ Operating in severe dust conditions. [SV33645( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Use of a transmission fluid other than specified could result in transmission malfunction and/or failure. Refer to “Adding automatic transmission fluid”, “Refill capacities” and “lubricant specifications” for further information. % Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid *[SV33701( ALL)02/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluid level at normal operating temperature 150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), after approximately 20 miles (32 km) of driving. However, if necessary, you can check the fluid level without having to drive 20 miles (32 km) to obtain a normal operating temperature if outside temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C). *[SV33801( ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds or in city traffic during hot weather, or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before checking. *[SV33910( ALL)12/91] With the vehicle on a level surface, start the engine and move the transmission shift selector through all of the gear ranges allowing sufficient time for each position to engage. Securely latch the transmission shift selector in the Park (P) position, fully set the parking brake and leave the engine running. *[SV33920(B F )06/94] NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the 4x4 option must have the 4x4 shift selector in any position other than neutral. *[SV33651( ALL)02/95] 314 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV33930( ALL)10/89] RWARNING Your vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the dipstick and outside temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C). *[SV33940( ALL)02/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick out and wipe the indicator end clean. Put the dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read the fluid level. *[SV33950( ALL)03/90] When checking fluid at normal operating temperature, the fluid level should be within the crosshatched area on the dipstick. When the vehicle has not been driven, and outside temperature is above 50˚F (10˚C), the fluid level should be between the holes on the dipstick. *[SV33960( ALL)05/95] *[SV33970( ALL)03/94] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid *[SV33980( ALL)10/89] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through the filler tube to bring the level to the correct area on the dipstick. If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. % *[SV33990( ALL)04/95] % The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick. Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct type will be used. NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. 315 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV34000(B FM)06/92] quarter page art:0020372-E Automatic transmission dipstick [SV34400(B F )01/95] Manual Transmission and Transfer Case Fluid [SV34600(B F )01/95] Checking the fluid *[SV34700(B F )12/91] Clean the filler plug on the side of the case. Remove the filler plug. The fluid level should be up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. *[SV34800(B F )03/91] If additional fluid is required: [SV34900(B F )01/95] 1. Add enough fluid through the filler plug hole to bring the level up to the bottom of the hole. Use only fluid certified to meet Ford Motor Company lubricant specification as listed under A Quick Reference for Refill Capacities and Motorcraft Parts, later in this section. *[SV35000(B F )03/91] 2. Replace the filler plug in its original position, making sure it is fully seated. *[SV35100(B F )02/95] *[SV35200(B F )03/91] The Clutch % *[SV35301(B F )03/91] The clutch on your vehicle is automatically self-adjusting and should not require any routine service. During normal operation the fluid level in the clutch reservoir will slowly rise. If for any reason the fluid level drops, maintain the fluid level at the step in the reservoir body. 316 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV35400(B F )03/94] % If it becomes necessary to remove the reservoir cap, thoroughly clean the reservoir cap before removing it to prevent dirt or water from entering the reservoir. Remove the internal diaphragm and then add only a DOT 3 brake fluid such as Ford High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid, meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. *[SV35600(B F )03/90] one third page art:0020377-A Clutch fluid reservoir *[SV35800( ALL)03/91] Driveline Universal Joint and Slip Yoke *[SV36000(BEF )06/93] The universal joints that come standard with your vehicle do not require lubrication. If your original equipment universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will be necessary at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. *[SV36100(B F )06/93] Your vehicle may be equipped with a constant velocity or double cardan joint at the transfer case end of the driveshaft. The front driveshaft double cardan joint may be fitted with a flush type grease fitting that requires an adapter to permit proper lubrication. Lubricate the drive joint according to the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. 317 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV36200(B F )05/90] quarter page art:0020379-A Double cardan joint *[SV36300( ALL)03/95] *[SV36350( ALL)05/90] Brake Fluid Your vehicle is equipped with a brake fluid level indicator in the master cylinder which lights the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel when the brake fluid level is low. *[SV36400( ALL)04/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and the brake lining wears. *[SV36500( ALL)10/89] Check the brake fluid at least once a year. You can do this by looking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoir on the master cylinder. The fluid level should be at or near the MAX mark. *[SV36550( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Brake fluid is toxic. *[SV36560( ALL)05/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. 318 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV36600( ALL)02/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the filler cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA or DOT 3 equivalent fluid meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. *[SV36850( ALL)12/91] NOTE: If brake fluid is spilled on painted surfaces, it must be flushed and wiped away immediately. Brake fluid may dissolve the paint finish on your vehicle. *[SV36900( ALL)01/95] RWARNING If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. *[SV37000( ALL)01/95] *[SV37100( ALL)01/95] *[SV37200( ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line. If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below the seam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have the brake system inspected. RWARNING Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. *[SV37400(BEF )01/89] quarter page art:0020381-A Brake master cylinder 319 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV37600( ALL)03/95] *[SV37700( ALL)01/95] Power Steering Fluid Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall). *[SV37800( ALL)03/95] *[SV37900( ALL)02/95] To check the level of your power steering fluid: 1. Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluid reaches normal operating temperature. The power steering fluid will be at the right temperature when the engine coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is near the center of the NORMAL operating temperature range. *[SV38000( ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel back and forth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly is installed at this time. *[SV38100(BEF )05/95] % [SV38200( ALL)03/94] * 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which is highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). The fluid level should be between the arrows in the FULL HOT range, which is marked on the side of the dipstick, opposite the side marked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if the level is within the FULL HOT range. *[SV38250( ALL)03/94] one third page art:0021016-B Power steering dipstick 320 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV38600(B F )10/90] quarter page art:0020386-B Power steering reservoir *[SV38800( ALL)07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level, until you reach the FULL HOT range. Do not overfill. *[SV38900(BEF )01/95] *[SV39000(BEF )01/95] Use only power steering fluid that: *[SV39200( ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your vehicle for a long period of time before adding fluid. This can damage the power steering pump. *[SV39300( ALL)03/95] 6. *[SV39400( ALL)02/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it is cold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULL COLD range on the dipstick. The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperature is approximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C). ❑ meets Ford’s Specification ESW-M2C33-F, such as Ford Premium Power Steering Fluid, E6AZ-19582-AA or an equivalent Type F Automatic Transmission Fluid with a Ford registration number (an 8-digit number beginning with “2P” printed on the fluid container). When you are finished, put the dipstick back in and make sure that it fits snugly. 321 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV39405( ALL)06/93] NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel of your vehicle with the engine off. It could force power steering fluid out from the reservoir cap or in extreme cases, it could unseat the cap. *[SV39500( ALL)04/95] Fuses, Fuse Links and Circuit Breakers *[SV39650(B FM)12/91] Fuses, circuit breakers and fuse links protect your vehicle’s electrical system from overloading. If electrical parts in your vehicle are not working, the system may have been overloaded and blown a fuse or tripped a circuit breaker. Before you replace or repair any electrical parts, check the appropriate fuses or circuit breakers. *[SV39700( ALL)10/89] The following charts tell you which fuses or circuit breakers protect each electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows or a circuit breaker opens a circuit, all the parts of your vehicle that use that circuit will not work. *[SV39800( ALL)02/95] Once you have determined which fuses or circuit breakers to check, follow the procedures under Checking and replacing fuses or Checking and replacing circuit breakers later in this chapter. 322 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV40100(B F )03/94] full page art:0020390-L Fuses and their location 323 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV40120(B )05/95] thirty-six pica chart:0020993-E 324 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV40140(B )05/94] twenty-eight pica chart:0020994-C 325 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV40700(B )05/94] twenty-two pica chart:0020396-F *[SV41300( ALL)10/92] *[SV41400( ALL)10/92] Power distribution box *[SV41500( ALL)10/92] The high current fuses are coded as follows: 30 amp -light green, 40 amp - orange, 50 amp - red, 60 amp -blue. The high current fuses contained in the Power Distribution Box protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads; these fuses provide the connection between the battery and your vehicle’s electrical systems. 326 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV41600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. *[SV41620( ALL)05/95] *[SV41700( ALL)03/93] Ford recommends that high current fuses be replaced by a qualified technician. RWARNING Always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. *[SV41800( ALL)04/95] *[SV41900( ALL)05/95] A blown high current fuse may be replaced but will continue to blow until the cause of the overload condition is corrected. RWARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. 327 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV42150(B F )07/94] three fourths page art:0020840-F Power distribution box 328 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV42153(B )04/95] thirty-six pica chart:0021004-C 329 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV42154(B )04/95] twenty-eight pica chart:0021009-C *[SV42200( ALL)05/95] *[SV42300( ALL)02/95] *[SV42800(B F )03/91] % Checking and Replacing Fuses If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps: 1. 330 In order to find the fuse panel, you must first remove the cover from the lower edge of the instrument panel. You can do this by pulling on handle to disengage the fasteners. File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV42900(B F )03/91] one third page art:0020475-B Fuse panel cover *[SV43300( ALL)10/94] 2. The underside of the cover also contains a fuse pulling tool in case you need to replace a blown fuse. *[SV43350(B FM)10/92] *[SV43400( ALL)10/92] On the fuse panel cover, find the number of the fuse you want to check. The diagram on the cover tells you where to locate the fuse on the panel. 3. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look through the clear side of the fuse to see if the metal wire inside is separated. If it is, the fuse is blown and should be replaced. *[SV43500( ALL)10/92] quarter page art:0020405-A The side view of a fuse *[SV43600( ALL)10/92] 4. Replace the fuse with one that has the right amperage rating (see previous chart). 331 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV43700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. *[SV43800( ALL)10/92] *[SV44000( ALL)05/93] 5. *[SV44100( ALL)03/95] *[SV44200(BEF )03/95] Circuit Breakers *[SV44300( ALL)02/95] Since you need diagnostic equipment to check whether a circuit breaker works and such equipment comes with instructions, we do not discuss how to check circuit breakers. *[SV44400( ALL)10/92] However, you should know that the circuit breakers will reset themselves and allow the electrical parts to work again once the overload on the circuit is removed. If the circuit breakers continue to cut off electricity, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked. *[SV44500( ALL)02/95] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with the same amperage rating. To remove a circuit breaker mounted in the fuse panel, grip it with your finger and thumb and pull it straight out of its socket. % Put the fuse panel cover back on. Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to blow if you do not find what caused the overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have your electrical system checked. If you need to check a circuit breaker on the fuse panel, see Checking and replacing fuses to find out how to locate the fuse panel. Otherwise, locate the circuit breaker according to the instructions on the charts given earlier in this chapter. 332 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 % *[SV44600(BEF )03/95] *[SV44700(BEF )01/95] *[SV44800(BEF )01/95] *[SV44900(BEF )01/95] *[SV45000(BEF )01/95] *[SV45050(BEF )02/95] *[SV45100(BEF )01/95] *[SV45200(BEF )01/95] *[SV45300(BEF )01/95] % [SV45400(BEF )01/95] * Lights and Bulb Replacement It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lights frequently: ❑ headlamps ❑ tail lamps ❑ brakelamps ❑ high-mount brakelamp ❑ hazard flasher ❑ turn signals ❑ license plate lamp The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if: *[SV45500(BEF )01/95] ❑ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to *[SV45600(BEF )01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give you *[SV45700(BEF )01/95] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantially turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beams on enough light to see clearly at night away from a position slightly down and to the right 333 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV45800(BEF )03/95] *[SV45900(BEF )01/95] Headlamp Bulb The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable bulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replace the bulb, rather than the whole lamp. *[SV46000(BEF )05/95] RWARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. *[SV46050(BEF )12/91] NOTE: If the bulb is accidently touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used. *[SV46100(BEF )01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you can immediately replace it with a new one. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, contaminants may enter the headlamp housing and affect its performance. *[SV46200(BEF )03/91] one third page art:0020406-B Parts of a headlamp 334 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV46300(BEF )03/95] *[SV46400(BEF )01/95] Removing the headlamp bulb 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch on the instrument panel is in the OFF position. *[SV46501(B F )12/91] 2. Lift the hood and behind the headlamp remove the electrical connector by grasping the wires and pulling rearward. *[SV46700(B F )04/95] 3. Remove the bulb retaining ring by turning it 1/8 of a turn to free it from the socket. Then slide the ring off the plastic base. Keep the ring. You must use it again to hold the new bulb in place. *[SV46800(B F )04/95] 4. Carefully remove the bulb assembly from its socket by gently pulling it rearward without turning. *[SV46900(BEF )03/95] *[SV47000(BEF )02/95] Installing the headlamp bulb 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into the socket. You may need to turn the bulb left or right to line up the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the socket. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the socket until the plastic base contacts the rear of the socket. *[SV47100(BEF )02/95] 2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the rear of the socket. Lock the ring into the socket by rotating it clockwise until you feel a “stop”. *[SV47200(B F )02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into position. *[SV47300(BEF )02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they work properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again. 335 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV47310(B F )02/95] *[SV47320(B F )03/95] *[SV47330(B F )03/93] High-Mount Brakelamp Bulbs 1. Remove the two screws from the surface of the lens. *[SV47340(B F )03/93] 2. After removing the screws, remove the lamp assembly. *[SV47350(B F )03/93] 3. Remove the socket by rotating it 45˚ and pulling it out of the lamp that contains the burned-out bulb and replace the bulb. *[SV47360(B F )02/95] *[SV47365(B F )03/93] To install the high-mount brakelamp: 1. Push the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate 45˚. *[SV47370(B F )03/93] *[SV47375(B F )03/93] *[SV47382(B F )07/93] 2. Position the lamp assembly on vehicle. 3. Secure with two screws. To remove the brakelamp: half page art:0020849-C Replacing the high-mount brakelamp or cargo lamp bulb 336 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV47401(B )02/95] *[SV47402(B )03/93] Map Lamp Bulb (Overhead Console) To remove the lens, pry with a small screwdriver as shown: [SV47403(B )03/93] one third page art:0020977-A *[SV47404(B )03/93] To remove the bulbs, use a screwdriver or coin to push up and rotate counterclockwise 90˚. The bulb and bulb holder will then drop out from the lamp as shown: [SV47405(B )03/93] one third page art:0020978-A 337 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 * % [SV47625(BEF )02/95] [SV47725(B )04/95] Bulb specifications thirty-six pica chart:0020409-I 338 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV47750(B )03/91] eight pica chart:0020791-A % *[SV48600( ALL)03/95] *[SV48700(BEF )05/95] *[SV48725(B )05/95] Emission Control System Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter which enables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission requirements. RWARNING Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Under extreme conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the fuel system, the interior floor covering, or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. *[SV48800(BEF )05/95] *[SV48900( ALL)01/95] *[SV49000( ALL)01/95] *[SV49100( ALL)01/95] *[SV49200( ALL)03/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emission control parts continue to work properly: ❑ Use only unleaded fuel. ❑ Avoid running out of fuel. ❑ Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. ❑ Have the services listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet performed according to the specified schedule. The scheduled maintenance services are required because they are considered essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. 339 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV49250( ALL)03/95] In general, maintenance, replacement, or service of the emissions control devices or systems in your new Ford Motor Company vehicle or engine may be performed at your expense by any automotive repair establishment or individual using automotive parts equivalent to those which your vehicle or engine was originally equipped. *[SV49300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. *[SV49400(BEF )05/95] RWARNING On vehicles without original equipment floor covering or insulation, do not let passengers ride in your truck in a manner that allows contact between skin and the metal floor. *[SV49450( ALL)05/95] If other than Ford or Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured parts are used for maintenance, replacement, or for the service of components affecting emissions control, the owner should be assured that such parts are warranted by their manufacturer to be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. Please consult your warranty information booklet for complete warranty information. *[SV49500(BEF )05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss of oil pressure, the charge warning light, the check engine light, or the temperature warning light. These sometimes indicate that the emission system is not working properly. 340 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV49600( ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine or exhaust system. *[SV49700( ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. In some of the United States and in Canada, vehicle owners may be liable if their emission control device is removed or is prevented from working. *[SV49900( ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on for more than five seconds after you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires. *[SV50000( ALL)05/95] Information about your vehicle’s emission control system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune-up specifications. % *[SV51456( ALL)05/95] Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing *[SV51457( ALL)05/95] In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not ready for I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway driving to complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all of the OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBD II system is set to the ready condition. The amount % 341 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 of driving required to reach the ready condition varies with individual driving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimum amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below. If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do the additional driving required by law, a service center can perform this drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work. [SV51458( ALL)05/95] OBD II Drive Cycle [SV51459( ALL)04/95] The engine must be warmed up and at operating temperature before proceeding with the drive modes of the following OBD II Drive Cycle. [SV51461( ALL)04/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral) the vehicle for 4 minutes. [SV51463( ALL)04/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for manual transmission) for 40 seconds. *[SV51465( ALL)05/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h) at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds. *[SV51467( ALL)05/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 30 seconds. [SV51469( ALL)04/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for manual transmissions) for 40 seconds. *[SV51471( ALL)05/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at speeds between 25 and 40 mph (40-64 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15 minute drive cycle the following modes must be achieved: *[SV51473( ALL)05/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10 seconds each *[SV51475( ALL)05/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle position, and *[SV51477( ALL)05/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5 minute steady state throttle drives. 342 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV51479( ALL)05/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h). This should take approximately 5 minutes. *[SV51481( ALL)05/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at the selected speed between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes. *[SV51483( ALL)05/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying speeds between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h). *[SV51485( ALL)05/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drive for 40 seconds. *[SV51487( ALL)05/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can be turned off when convenient. 343 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV51500( ALL)03/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and Lubricant Specifications [SV51600( ALL)03/95] * [SV51800(B )03/94] Refill Capacities thirty-four pica chart:0020418-K 344 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV51900(B )03/94] thirty-four pica chart:0020419-D 345 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV52800( ALL)01/95] Motorcraft Parts [SV53000(B )05/95] sixteen pica chart:0020429-M 346 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 * [SV53500( ALL)01/95] [SV53900(B )05/95] thirty-six pica chart:0020437-G Lubricant specifications 347 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV53950(B )04/95] thirty-six pica chart:0020508-H 348 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV54000(B )05/95] thirty-six pica chart:0020438-M 349 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 [SV54100(B )04/95] thirty-six pica chart:0020439-L 350 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 % *[SV56000( ALL)01/95] *[SV56100( ALL)01/95] *[SV56150( ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage Maintenance Tips If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. *[SV56200( ALL)01/95] *[SV56300( ALL)01/95] *[SV56400( ALL)01/95] *[SV56500( ALL)01/95] General *[SV56600( ALL)01/95] *[SV56700( ALL)01/95] Body *[SV56800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed *[SV56900( ALL)01/95] ❑ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent *[SV57000( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a *[SV57100( ALL)04/95] ❑ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges *[SV57200( ALL)01/95] *[SV57300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading. ❑ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and ❑ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. ❑ Protect from sunlight, if possible. ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. ❑ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders. locations. rust. thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed. and latches with a light grade oil. solvents. 351 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV57350( ALL)01/95] *[SV57400( ALL)01/95] Engine *[SV57500( ALL)01/95] ❑ With your foot on the brake, shift through all *[SV57600( ALL)01/95] *[SV57700( ALL)07/94] Fuel system *[SV57900( ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days or more), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This can damage rubber and other polymers in the fuel system and may also clog small orifices. *[SV58000( ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructions on the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system. *[SV58100( ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system will protect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructions packaged with the product. *[SV58200( ALL)01/95] *[SV58300( ALL)01/95] % [SV58400( ALL)01/95] * *[SV58500( ALL)01/95] *[SV58600( ALL)01/95] Cooling system *[SV58700( ALL)01/95] *[SV58800( ALL)01/95] Brakes % % % % ❑ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature. the gears while the engine is running. ❑ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. ❑ Protect against freezing temperatures. Battery ❑ Check and recharge as necessary. ❑ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat of grease. ❑ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released. 352 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 *[SV58900( ALL)01/95] *[SV59000(B FM)05/95] *[SV59100( ALL)01/95] *[SV59200( ALL)01/95] Tires *[SV59300( ALL)03/95] ❑ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 % ❑ Maintain recommended air pressures. Miscellaneous ❑ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. days to lubricate working parts to prevent corrosion. 353 File:ltsvb.ex Update:Tue Jun 20 16:56:22 1995 thirty-six pica chart:FORDADPLN 354 File:ltqib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:47 1995 [QI02400(B )05/95] full page art:0021504-B Warning label locations 355 File:ltqib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:47 1995 [QI02700(B )06/93] full page art:0021024-A Front exterior view 356 File:ltqib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:47 1995 [QI03300(B )06/93] full page art:0021030-A Rear exterior view 357 File:ltqib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:47 1995 [QI03900(B )05/94] full page art:0021036-C Entrance view 358 File:ltqib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:47 1995 [QI04500(B )06/93] full page art:0021042-A Driver’s door 359 File:ltqib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:47 1995 [QI05100(B )05/94] full page art:0021048-D Instrument panel 360 File:ltqib.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:47 1995 [QI05700(B )01/94] full page art:0021054-B Instrument cluster 361 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Index A ABS warning light (see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . . 77 Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 60 Accessory power source, power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . 148 Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 291 Air bag supplemental restraint system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 service and information labels . . . . . . 32 tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning, manual heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Alarm, activating remote personal . . . . 122 Alcohol, in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Ambulance packages . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 295 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 255 Audio system (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 149 Automatic transmission, fluid, refill capacities 344 Automatic transmission driving an automatic overdrive . . . . 175 fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Index 363 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Automatic transmission (continued) fluid, checking . . . . . . . . fluid, specification . . . . . . . Axle lubricant specifications. . . . . traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 347 . . . . 347 . . 212, 305 B Backing up . . . . . . . . . . . Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . Battery acid, treating emergencies . . . battery saver . . . . . . . . . charging system warning light . how to service . . . . . . . . jumping a disabled battery . . . maintenance-free . . . . . . . proper disposal, recycling . . . replacement, specifications . . . voltage gauge. . . . . . . . . when storing your vehicle . . . Brake fluid brake warning light . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . Brakelamp, high-mount brakelamp Brakes adjustment . . . . . . . . . . anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light. . . . . . . . applying the brakes . . . . . . brake warning light . . . . . . fluid, checking and adding . . . fluid, refill capacities . . . . . fluid, specifications . . . . . . front disc. . . . . . . . . . . if brakes do not grip well . . . new brake linings . . . . . . . parking . . . . . . . . . . . stopping distances. . . . . . . 364 Index . . . . 178 . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, . . . . . . . . . . . 312 125 81 311 237 311 312 346 82 352 . . . . . 76 . . . . 319 . . 101, 336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 204 . . 77 . 207 . . 76 . 318 . 344 . 319 . 203 . 206 . . 7 . 208 . 207 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Brakes (continued) trailer . . . . . . . . . . when storing your vehicle . Brake-shift interlock . . . . . Break-in period . . . . . . . Bulbs, replacing headlamps . . . . . . . . high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 . 352 66, 178 . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 336 C Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . Cassette tape player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . 163, Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . CD player (see Electronic sound system) . Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . Charging system warning light . . . . . . . Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . Child safety seats, attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chime headlamps on . . . . . . . . . . . . . key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers, checking and replacing. . Cleaning your vehicle CD player and discs . . . . . . . . . chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . engine compartment . . . . . . . . . exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 265 344 71 37 168 339 156 310 241 82 81 34 36 37 57 84 61 78 332 160 9 281 8 Index 365 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Cleaning your vehicle (continued) exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate control system air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . heating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . heating only system . . . . . . . . . . . Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, Clutch adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . operation while driving . . . . . . . . recommended shift speeds . . . . . . . shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact disc player (see Electronic sound system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact disc radio (see Electronic sound system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass, electronic . . . . . . . . . . . accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass/temperature display . . . . . . Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Index 99 135 99 103 103 9 8 9 25 99 135 8 311 90 90 94 169 316 317 317 182 185 183 65 150 150 142 143 143 142 140 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Controls instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steering column . . . . . . . . . . Coolant (see Engine coolant) checking and adding . . . . . . . . drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . preparing for storage . . . . . . . . proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.). Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 . 139 . 105 . 295 . 299 . 352 . 297 . 344 . 298 . . 85 . 111 . 257 . 257 . . . . . . . . . 89 99 97 313, . . . . 315 320 258 119 317 D Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . . Daytime running light system . . . . Defrost, rear window . . . . . . . . Dipstick automatic transmission fluid . . . . power steering fluid . . . . . . . Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driveline universal joint and slip yoke Driving under special conditions bad weather . . . . . . . . . . . heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . high speed . . . . . . . . . . . . high water . . . . . . . . . . . . slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 214 211 213 211 E Electrical system circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 operating when the engine is off . . . . . 60 Index 367 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Electrical system (continued) power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . 148 Electronic sound system radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . 151, 165 warranty and service information. . . . 174 Electronic stereo cassette radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 163 Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Emergencies, roadside assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . 237, 313 jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . 208 Emission control system, catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Engine check engine warning light . . . . . . . 78 fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . . 63 fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . 69 preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 service points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 65 starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 69 storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 352 Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Engine coolant checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 295 checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 294, 298, 315 preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 352 proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 296 refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Engine coolant temperature gauge, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 368 Index File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Engine knocking . . . . . Engine oil checking and adding . . dipstick . . . . . . . . disposal . . . . . . . . engine oil pressure gauge filter, specifications . . . refill capacities . . . . . specifications . . . . . . synthetic oil . . . . . . “break-in” oils . . . . . viscosity . . . . . . . . Entry system illuminated. . . . . . . remote. . . . . . . . . Exhaust fumes . . . . . . Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 292 315 83 346 344 290 291 7 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, . . . . . . . . . . 125 . 121 . . 71 . . 4 F Federal Communications Commission . Federal Highway Administration Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . Flashers, hazard. . . . . . . . . . . Flashing the lights. . . . . . . . . . Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . 4WD light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4x4 systems - lever operated . . . . . 4x4 systems - touch drive . . . . . . Four-Wheel Drive vehicles description . . . . . . . . . . . . driving off road . . . . . . . . . indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 . . 6 . 109 . 107 . 241 . 344 . 257 . 258 . . 4 . 264 . . . . 191, . . . . 264 263 197 189 196 . . . . . . 188 200 191 Index 369 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Four-Wheel Drive vehicles (continued) lever operated . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 special notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252–253 Four-wheeling with Ford supplement . . . . 5 French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3 Fuel calculating fuel economy. . . . . . . . 289 capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 choosing the right fuel. . . . . . . . . 283 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 filling your vehicle with fuel . . . . . . 281 filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 346 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 improving fuel economy . . . . . . . . 290 octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 288 storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 352 treating emergencies. . . . . . . . . . 286 Fuel cap removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 288 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 346 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Fuel pump shut-off switch, starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Fuse panels instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . 323 power distribution box . . . . . . . . 326 Fuses checking and replacing . . . . . . . . 330 circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 G Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 281 Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . 283, 289 Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 281 370 Index File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Gauges, Mechanical battery voltage gauge . . . . . . . charging system gauge . . . . . . engine coolant temperature gauge . engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . definition . . . . . . . . . . . . Gearshift automatic operation . . . . . . . . manual operation . . . . . . . . . positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . shift-lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 82 85 83 84 86 88 . . 221 214, 219 . . . . . . 176, . 66, 176 182 176 183 178 . . 221 214, 219 H Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamps checking alignment . . . . . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . daytime running lights . . . . . . flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . turning on and off . . . . . . . . warning chime . . . . . . . . . . Heating heating and air conditioning system standard heater system . . . . . . High beams, indicator light . . . . . High-mount brakelamp description . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing the bulb . . . . . . . . Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 333 99 99 107 106 333 . 98 . 84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 94 84 101 336 229 Index 371 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Hood latch location release lever Horn . . . . . Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 278 110 299 I Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) Idle, relearning . . . . . . . . . . Ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . positions of the ignition . . . . . removing the key . . . . . . . . Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . lighting up panel and interior . . location of components . . . . . registers . . . . . . . . . . . . Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 59 61 37 73 76 . . . . . . . . . . . 103 . 100 . . 89 . . 90 . 107 J Jack operation . . . . . . . positioning . . . . . . Jump-starting your vehicle attaching cables . . . . disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 240 K Keys positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 59 removing from the ignition . . . . . . . 61 stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . 60 372 Index File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 L Lamps cargo lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . combination cargo and brakelamp . . courtesy lamps . . . . . . . . . . . daytime running light system . . . . dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . . hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights, warning and indicator air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . anti-lock brakes (ABS). . . . . . . . brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . charging system . . . . . . . . . . check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . overdrive off . . . . . . . . . . . . rear ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing the warning lights . . . . . . Load limits GAWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . Locking hubs lever operated with automatic . . . . lever operated with manual . . . . . Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 100 . 333 . 101 . 100 . . 99 . 100 . 107 . 109 . . 98 . 106 . 336 . 100 . 102 . 333 . 231 . 105 . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . 191, . . . . . . . . . 81 77 76 81 78 197 84 177 77 78 64 . . . 214 214 216 . . . 191 194 347 Index 373 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Lug nuts, tightening sequence . . . . . . Lumbar support, seats . . . . . . . . . . 249 134 M Maintenance schedule and record (see separate Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet) . . . . . . . . Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . Manual transmission clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fluid, checking and adding . . . . . lubricant specifications. . . . . . . shifting gears . . . . . . . . . . . shift speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . Mileage, calculating fuel economy. . . Mirrors automatic dimming rearview mirror dual electric remote control . . . . rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . side view mirrors (manual) . . . . Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . 275 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 182 316 347 183 185 318 289 . . . . . . . . . . 136 139 135 137 346 National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 N O Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . Off road driving, 4-wheel drive . . . Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system Order forms, service information . . Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 . . 87 . 200 . 346 . 290 . 341 . 267 . 179 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Overhead console compass/temperature display . . . . . map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storage compartment . . . . . . . . . 142 145 146 P Panic alarm feature, remote entry system Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . Power distribution box (see Fuses) . . . Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . Power features door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power point electrical outlet . . . . . . Power steering dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . driving with power steering . . . . . fluid, checking and adding . . . . . fluid, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 . 208 . . 76 . 346 . 346 . 326 . 121 . 121 . 134 . 139 126–127 . 148 . . . . . . . 320 187 320 344 321 187 278 systems) . . . 149 R Radio (see Electronic sound Rear axle lubricant specification . . traction lok. . . . . . . Rearview mirror . . . . . Rear window . . . . . . . defroster . . . . . . . . Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, . . . . . . . . . 347 305 136 126 97 344 Index 375 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Remote entry system illuminated entry . . . . . . . . . locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . replacement/additional transmitters. replacing the batteries . . . . . . . Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints) adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 122 122 124 123 . . . . . . . . 11 . . 34 . . 34 . 255 . 237 . 305 Safe driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . . Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . Safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety restraints automatic locking mode (retractor) . . center front lap belt . . . . . . . . . center rear lap belt . . . . . . . . . cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . dual locking mode retractors . . . . . extension assembly . . . . . . . . . for children. . . . . . . . . . . . . for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . for pregnant women. . . . . . . . . lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . untwisting or unjamming the safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . warning light and chime. . . . . . . Safety seats for children, attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . 210 . . 11 . 230 . 262 S 376 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 19 19 25 13 24 34 34 11 17 25 . . 21 . . 78 . . 57 . 128 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Seats (continued) child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . rear flip fold seat . . . . . . . . . . seatback release. . . . . . . . . . . Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing your vehicle, precautions when servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . Shift positions (see Gearshift). . . . . . Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints) . . Snowplowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . Spare tire changing the tire . . . . . . . . . . conventional spare . . . . . . . . . finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . Special driving conditions . . . . . . . Special notice, utility-type vehicles . . . Specification chart, lubricants. . . . . . Speed control accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . canceling a set speed . . . . . . . . resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . resuming a set speed . . . . . . . . when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting your vehicle preparing to start your vehicle . . . . starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . starting after a collision . . . . . . . starting a warm engine . . . . . . . Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 . 135 . 134 . 131 . 130 . . 5 . 256 . 276 66, 178 . 183 . . 17 . . 17 . 235 . 310 . 244 . 241 . 242 . 346 . 210 . . 5 . 347 . . . . . . . 114 117 114 117 232 86 . . . . . 64 65 69 66 187 . . . . Index 377 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Steering wheel horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . speed controls . . . . . . . . . tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage compartments center console. . . . . . . . . . overhead storage compartment . . Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . Supplemental air bag readiness light Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 111 110 . . . . . . 140 . 146 . 351 . . 81 . . 25 Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tail lamps, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . Temperature control (see Climate control) Testing the warning lights . . . . . . . Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . Tires changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . checking the pressure . . . . . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inspection and maintenance . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . Towing your vehicle, with a tow truck . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission, fluid, refill capacities . . . Transfer case fluid checking . . . . . . . . . . . lever operated . . . . . . . . . . . touch drive electric shift . . . . . . . . 119 . . 99 . . 90 . . 64 T 378 Index . . 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 304 311 304 307 305 310 241 353 310 251 215 344 . . . 316 189 196 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Transmission automatic operation . . . . . . . . fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . fluid, checking and adding (manual) lubricant specifications . . . . . . manual operation . . . . . . . . . Transmission control switch . . . . . Transmitter (see Remote entry) . . . . Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . Turn signal, lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 . . . . . . . . 314 316 347 182 179 121 341 105 . . . . . . . . U Used engine oil, disposal . . . . 294, 298, 315 V Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) decal . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) . . . . . . . . 107 . 341 . . 5 . 216 . 351 . . 82 W Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . Warning chimes key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning lights, testing. . . . . . . . Warning lights (see Lights). . . . . . Warranties, radio . . . . . . . . . . Warranty Information Booklet . . . . Washer fluid, reservoir . . . . . . . Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . Wheel and tire matching. . . . . . . Wheel bearings lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 . . . . 61 78 64 73 174 . 4 301 214 310 347 Index 379 File:ltixb.ex Update:Fri Jun 9 15:21:14 1995 Wheels cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . inspection and maintenance . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power windows, operating . . . . . Windshield washer fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid . . . . . checking and replacing wiper blades operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Index . . . . . . . . 311 303 126 127 . . . . . . . . 301, 301 302 107 301 347